159194 2014-02-07T15:45:51-05:00 266150 false Accounting 1 2015-08-21T04:41:06-04:00 1 1 2014-02-12T14:37:22-05:00 8 17 Activity Description Time Sheets Time Sheets help you keep track of the employees who are currently working on job orders/assignments. It provides the accounting department with the ability to know how many hours the employee has worked and how many hours should be billed to the Customer by checking the time sheets that have been  submitted and approved. Expenses Expenses can be entered to calculate the exact amount that has been spent by an employee for business purposes. You can keep a check of all the expenses that the employee has incurred by looking at the submitted and approved expenses. Accounts The Accounts feature provides detailed information about the financial transactions that have occurred within the organization. It displays a list of the chart of the accounts, which includes all financial transactions such as deposits, payments and the balance amount due. Customers The Customers feature in Accounting will maintain a list of all the customers/clients details. Under Customers, you can create invoices, deliver invoices and receive payments per those delivered invoices. Also, the history of invoices is maintained in an area called invoice history where users can view which invoices have been paid and which invoices still have outstanding balances. Vendors Accounting provides users with the options to designate three different types of Vendors: General Vendors, Consulting Vendors, and Consultants. The Vendors feature helps you to keep track of all the paid bills, and bills that are due. This feature enables users to create bills, and monitor all of the financial transactions pertaining to the vendors. Employees This feature provides users with the visibility to see gross earnings per employee or if the Quickbooks Sync is enabled pay stubs that are processed in Quickbooks can be accessed as well. Banking Banking  helps you to create new bank accounts and allows you to track financial transactions within Akken. Assignments Assignments feature enables users to manage the assignments/work orders for the employees.  Assignments are created when a candidate is placed on a Job order in CRM. Workers Compensation The Workers Compensation Codes home page displays the list of compensation codes that are created by the user. <table cellspacing="0" style="font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium;"><tbody> <tr> <td width="115"><b>Activity</b></td> <td width="680"><b>Description</b></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="115"><span style="font-size: small;">Time Sheets</span></td> <td width="680"><span style="font-size: small;">Time Sheets help you keep track of the employees who are currently working on job orders/assignments. It provides the accounting department with the ability to know how many hours the employee has worked and how many hours should be billed to the Customer by checking the time sheets that have been  submitted and approved.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="115"><span style="font-size: small;">Expenses</span></td> <td width="680"><span style="font-size: small;">Expenses can be entered to calculate the exact amount that has been spent by an employee for business purposes. You can keep a check of all the expenses that the employee has incurred by looking at the submitted and approved expenses.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="115"><span style="font-size: small;">Accounts</span></td> <td width="680"><span style="font-size: small;">The Accounts feature provides detailed information about the financial transactions that have occurred within the organization. It displays a list of the chart of the accounts, which includes all financial transactions such as deposits, payments and the balance amount due.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="115"><span style="font-size: small;">Customers</span></td> <td width="680"><span style="font-size: small;">The Customers feature in Accounting will maintain a list of all the customers/clients details. Under Customers, you can create invoices, deliver invoices and receive payments per those delivered invoices. Also, the history of invoices is maintained in an area called invoice history where users can view which invoices have been paid and which invoices still have outstanding balances.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="115"><span style="font-size: small;">Vendors</span></td> <td width="680"><span style="font-size: small;">Accounting provides users with the options to designate three different types of Vendors: General Vendors, Consulting Vendors, and Consultants. The Vendors feature helps you to keep track of all the paid bills, and bills that are due. This feature enables users to create bills, and monitor all of the financial transactions pertaining to the vendors.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="115"><span style="font-size: small;">Employees</span></td> <td width="680"><span style="font-size: small;">This feature provides users with the visibility to see gross earnings per employee or if the Quickbooks Sync is enabled pay stubs that are processed in Quickbooks can be accessed as well.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="115"><span style="font-size: small;">Banking</span></td> <td width="680"><span style="font-size: small;">Banking  helps you to create new bank accounts and allows you to track financial transactions within Akken.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="115"><span style="font-size: small;">Assignments</span></td> <td width="680"><span style="font-size: small;">Assignments feature enables users to manage the assignments/work orders for the employees.  Assignments are created when a candidate is placed on a Job order in CRM.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="115"><span style="font-size: small;">Workers Compensation</span></td> <td width="680"><span style="font-size: small;">The Workers Compensation Codes home page displays the list of compensation codes that are created by the user.</span></td> </tr> </tbody></table> 266150 1096 189996 2015-04-22T16:01:12-04:00 1 2 8 17 Accounting in Brief 2015-08-21T16:52:01-04:00 12054499 1 2014-02-12T14:38:55-05:00 1 2 Icon Function Description Calendar Click to select the desired date Create New Click to create a new record Approved Time Sheet Click to view approved time sheet Approved Expenses Click to view approved expenses Add Row Click  to add a row in time sheet, and expenses Delete Row Click  to delete a row in time sheet, and expenses Submit Click to Submit the time sheet, and expenses Send Click to send the time sheet submission reminder to the employees of the organization Reminder Setup Click to setup the reminder dates Cancel Click to cancel the process, and return to previous page Reject Click to reject the submitted time sheet, and expenses Edit Click to edit the submitted time sheet, and expenses Delete Row Click  to delete a row in time sheet, and expenses Create New Account Click to create new account in the Accounts screen Add New Account Click to add new created account in the Accounts screen Edit Account Click to edit the accounts in the Account screen Update Account Click to update the edited account in the Edit screen Delete Click to delete a record temporarily View Archive Click to view temporarily deleted records Make Available Click to retrieve temporarily deleted records, and make it available in the active record list Customer Register Click to view the list of registered customers Generate Invoice Click to generate the created invoice Recalculate Invoice Click to recalculate the changes made in the created invoice Preview Invoice Click to preview the invoice before generating Back Click to go back to the previous page Deliver Invoice Click to deliver the invoice Update Invoice Click to update the invoice in the Deliver Invoice screen Receive Payments Register Click to view the list of received payments for the generated invoices Receive Pay Click to receive the payment from the selected customer Add a Vendor Click to add a new vendor Save Vendor Click to save the added new vendor Vendor Register Click to view the list of vendors Update Vendor Click to update the changes made in the vendor detail Close Click to close the pop-up window Recalculate Bills Click to recalculate the changes made in the created bills Save Bills Click to save the changes made in the created bills Edit Bills Click to edit the bills for the received bills Bill Payment Register Click to view the details of the paid bills of all the vendors Pay Bill Click to make the payment for the selected vendor Employee Register Click to view the list of employees and their respective pay stub amount Payroll Setup Click to make the payroll setup for all employees Save Payroll Setup Click to save the modifications in the payroll setup Run Gross Pay Click to run the gross pay that are generated Update Net Pay Click to update the net pay Add Item Click to add an item before generating the net pay Run Net Pay Click to run the net pay that are generated Save Nat Pay Click to save the modifications in the net pay Work Journal Click to view the details of the generated pay stubs of the employees Approve Pay Stub Click to approve the generated pay stub Write Checks Click to make payments to any of the selected account Add Row Click  to add a row in write checks to make payments for more than one payee Make Deposit Click to deposit the received amount to the company account Add Transaction Click  to add a new transaction Edit Transaction Click  to edit an existing transaction Update Transaction Click to update the edited transaction Delete Transaction Click  to delete a transaction Start Click to start the import/export process Import Click to import the data from quick books application <p><br></p> <table cellspacing="0" style="font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium;"><tbody> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><b>Icon</b></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Function</b></td> <td width="535"><b>Description</b></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image009.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Calendar</b></td> <td width="535">Click to select the desired date</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image010.gif" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Create New</b></td> <td width="535">Click to create a new record</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image011.gif" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Approved Time Sheet</b></td> <td width="535">Click to view approved time sheet</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image011.gif" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Approved Expenses</b></td> <td width="535">Click to view approved expenses</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Add Row</b></td> <td width="535">Click  to add a row in time sheet, and expenses</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image013.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Delete Row</b></td> <td width="535">Click  to delete a row in time sheet, and expenses</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image014.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Submit</b></td> <td width="535">Click to Submit the time sheet, and expenses</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image015.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Send</b></td> <td width="535">Click to send the time sheet submission reminder to the employees of the organization</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image016.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Reminder Setup</b></td> <td width="535">Click to setup the reminder dates</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image017.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Cancel</b></td> <td width="535">Click to cancel the process, and return to previous page</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image018.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Reject</b></td> <td width="535">Click to reject the submitted time sheet, and expenses</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image019.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Edit</b></td> <td width="535">Click to edit the submitted time sheet, and expenses</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image020.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Delete Row</b></td> <td width="535">Click  to delete a row in time sheet, and expenses</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Create New Account</b></td> <td width="535">Click to create new account in the Accounts screen</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Add New Account</b></td> <td width="535">Click to add new created account in the Accounts screen</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image019.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Edit Account</b></td> <td width="535">Click to edit the accounts in the Account screen</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image021.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Update Account</b></td> <td width="535">Click to update the edited account in the Edit screen</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image020.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Delete</b></td> <td width="535">Click to delete a record temporarily</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image022.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>View Archive</b></td> <td width="535">Click to view temporarily deleted records</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image016.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Make Available</b></td> <td width="535">Click to retrieve temporarily deleted records, and make it available in the active record list</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Customer Register</b></td> <td width="535">Click to view the list of registered customers</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image023.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Generate Invoice</b></td> <td width="535">Click to generate the created invoice</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image024.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Recalculate Invoice</b></td> <td width="535">Click to recalculate the changes made in the created invoice</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image025.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Preview Invoice</b></td> <td width="535">Click to preview the invoice before generating</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image026.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Back</b></td> <td width="535">Click to go back to the previous page</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image027.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Deliver Invoice</b></td> <td width="535">Click to deliver the invoice</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image021.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Update Invoice</b></td> <td width="535">Click to update the invoice in the Deliver Invoice screen</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Receive Payments Register</b></td> <td width="535">Click to view the list of received payments for the generated invoices</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image028.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Receive Pay</b></td> <td width="535">Click to receive the payment from the selected customer</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Add a Vendor</b></td> <td width="535">Click to add a new vendor</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image029.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Save Vendor</b></td> <td width="535">Click to save the added new vendor</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Vendor Register</b></td> <td width="535">Click to view the list of vendors</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image021.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Update Vendor</b></td> <td width="535">Click to update the changes made in the vendor detail</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image020.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Close</b></td> <td width="535">Click to close the pop-up window</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image024.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Recalculate Bills</b></td> <td width="535">Click to recalculate the changes made in the created bills</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image029.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Save Bills</b></td> <td width="535">Click to save the changes made in the created bills</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image019.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Edit Bills</b></td> <td width="535">Click to edit the bills for the received bills</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image016.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Bill Payment Register</b></td> <td width="535">Click to view the details of the paid bills of all the vendors</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image028.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Pay Bill</b></td> <td width="535">Click to make the payment for the selected vendor</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Employee Register</b></td> <td width="535">Click to view the list of employees and their respective pay stub amount</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image028.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Payroll Setup</b></td> <td width="535">Click to make the payroll setup for all employees</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image029.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Save Payroll Setup</b></td> <td width="535">Click to save the modifications in the payroll setup</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image030.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Run Gross Pay</b></td> <td width="535">Click to run the gross pay that are generated</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image021.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Update Net Pay</b></td> <td width="535">Click to update the net pay</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Add Item</b></td> <td width="535">Click to add an item before generating the net pay</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image030.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Run Net Pay</b></td> <td width="535">Click to run the net pay that are generated</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image029.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Save Nat Pay</b></td> <td width="535">Click to save the modifications in the net pay</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image031.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Work Journal</b></td> <td width="535">Click to view the details of the generated pay stubs of the employees</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image011.gif" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Approve Pay Stub</b></td> <td width="535">Click to approve the generated pay stub</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image032.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Write Checks</b></td> <td width="535">Click to make payments to any of the selected account</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Add Row</b></td> <td width="535">Click  to add a row in write checks to make payments for more than one payee</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image029.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Make Deposit</b></td> <td width="535">Click to deposit the received amount to the company account</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image012.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Add Transaction</b></td> <td width="535">Click  to add a new transaction</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image019.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px" style="cursor: default;"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Edit Transaction</b></td> <td width="535">Click  to edit an existing transaction</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image021.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Update Transaction</b></td> <td width="535">Click to update the edited transaction</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image013.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Delete Transaction</b></td> <td width="535">Click  to delete a transaction</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image033.jpg" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Start</b></td> <td width="535">Click to start the import/export process</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="59.4pt"><img src="https://appserver2.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image034.gif" alt="" width="16px" height="16px"></td> <td width="117pt"><b>Import</b></td> <td width="535">Click to import the data from quick books application</td> </tr> </tbody></table> 266150 571 189998 2015-04-22T16:02:17-04:00 2 2 1 2 List of Icons 2015-08-21T04:41:07-04:00 12054499 1 2014-02-12T14:55:20-05:00 0 0 The Send Reminders feature in Time Sheets allows you to send an email as a reminder to all the active employees who have active assignments and who have not submitted their time sheets. To send a reminder message, perform the below steps: Click on Send Reminders link in the Time Sheets home page. The following pop up message is displayed. In the above message, specify the start date and end date and click on Continue. The Send Reminders screen is displayed. Note: Employees who have not submitted their time sheets in the above specified date range will get the reminder. The Send Reminders screen displays the duration dates selected in the reminders pop up message. You can enter the reminder notes in the field provided and click on Send to send the reminder message. Click on Cancel to ignore the changes made in Send Reminders screen. <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The <strong>Send Reminders</strong> feature in <strong>Time Sheets</strong> allows you to send an email as a reminder to all the active employees who have active assignments and who have not submitted their time sheets.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To send a reminder message, perform the below steps:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><br></span></p><ol style="font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on <strong>Send Reminders</strong> link in the Time Sheets home page. The following pop up message is displayed.</span></li></ol><div><font size="4"><span><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502238/original/i1ux4rOhamJMlvMnl8oOVkw7KmajVx6CWw?1501078126" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502238/original/i1ux4rOhamJMlvMnl8oOVkw7KmajVx6CWw?1501078126" data-fileid="4041502238" data-uniquekey="1501078106124"></p> <ol><li> <span style="color: rgb(102, 102, 102); font-size: large; line-height: 1.3;">In the above message, specify the start date and end date and click on </span><b style="color: rgb(102, 102, 102); font-size: large; line-height: 1.3;">Continue</b><span style="color: rgb(102, 102, 102); font-size: large; line-height: 1.3;">. The </span><b style="color: rgb(102, 102, 102); font-size: large; line-height: 1.3;">Send Reminders </b><span style="color: rgb(102, 102, 102); font-size: large; line-height: 1.3;">screen is displayed.</span> </li></ol></span></font></div><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><strong>Note</strong>: Employees who have not submitted their time sheets in the above specified date range will get the reminder.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><br></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"></span></p><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502272/original/hbfMkFzlIgmrVgwKVyGrgFDGMRo3Un62bw?1501078164" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502272/original/hbfMkFzlIgmrVgwKVyGrgFDGMRo3Un62bw?1501078164" data-fileid="4041502272" data-uniquekey="1501078106124"></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p><ol style="font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Send Reminders screen displays the duration dates selected in the reminders pop up message. You can enter the reminder notes in the field provided and click on <strong>Send</strong> to send the reminder message.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on <strong>Cancel</strong> to ignore the changes made in <strong>Send Reminders</strong> screen.</span></li> </ol> 266150 423 190007 2017-07-26T10:09:42-04:00 4004241107 3 2 0 0 Send Reminders 2015-08-21T04:41:07-04:00 12054499 1 2014-04-11T15:17:51-04:00 16 9 Accounting Time sheets Home In the Time Sheet Home Page, you will find the list of time sheets that have been submitted by the employees that still require approval. The submitted Time Sheets need to be reviewed, and then approved by the accountant or HR manager. The employees, who have submitted the Time Sheets, can either be an internal employee, or an employee who is working on an assignment or job order at a client company. In the Time Sheet Home Page, you can find the following: The From date field and To date field in the top right corner of the screen, where it automatically displays the dates from when the Time Sheets have been submitted by the employees. An option to edit the Time Sheet dates from the From and To fields in the top right corner of the screen and click on the View link, available beside the calendar icon. The screen refreshes by displaying the Time Sheet details based on the dates specified. Columns that display the Employee Name, Employee ID, Start Date,End Date, and Total Hours respectively. Each column will have their corresponding record details. The ability to create  New Time Sheets by clicking on the ‘New Time Sheet’ link, as well as view the approved time sheets by clicking on the ‘Approved Time Sheets’ link.  See theNew Time Sheet and Approved Time Sheets topics for more details. Click on the ‘Send Reminders’ link in order to remind the employees to submit their weekly time sheets. See the Send Reminders topic for more details. Approve or reject multiple employees’   time sheets at a time using the Update Status link available in the Time Sheets home page. APPROVING/REJECTING MULTIPLE TIME SHEETS To approve/reject time sheets of multiple employees, do the following: 1.  Select the required employee(s) time sheets and click on Update Status link. The system displays theUpdate Status for TimeSheet(s) screen as shown below:   2.  In the above screen, Select the Approve selected Employee(s) Timesheet(s) option if you wish to approve the time sheets. Select the Reject selected Employee(s) Timesheet(s) option if you wish to reject the time sheets. You can also enter the notes while accepting or rejecting the timesheets in the Notes text area. Once you have specified the details, click on Update Status to update the status of the employee time sheets. Click Cancel to cancel the Update Status for TimeSheet(s) screen. Add a New Time Sheet You can create a new time sheet for your temporary staff employees who have not submitted their timesheets. You can also create a time sheet for yourself or other internal staff members, if required. Time sheets are used to enter the number of hours worked by the employee during the work week. You can create a time sheet for any date range i.e. from a day to a year. To create a new time sheet, do the following: Click on New Timesheet link available in the Time Sheets home page. The system displays the Add New Time Sheet screen as shown below: In the above screen: The start date of the time sheet is displayed by default in the top right corner of the Time Sheet. If the date range needs to be updated to a different time frame you can use calendar icon to adjust the to and from dates. The screen will refresh, and generates a New Time Sheet Screen, which allows you to fill the Time Sheet details for 7 consecutive days, starting from the start date specified. You can select any date range to create new time sheets. You can also have an option to enter hours for the entire date range selected at the top of the screen or you can enter in time per day using the multiple rows listed. The Time Sheet screen has four links in the provided strip bar: ‘Add Row’, ‘Delete Row’, ‘Submit’, and ‘Cancel’ links respectively. The details of the time sheets are displayed under the following columns: Date, Assignments, Class, Type, Hours and Billable columns respectively. The Task Details field is displayed below the Assignments column. Enter the details of the tasks performed by the employee in the Task Details field. Select an employee for whom you want to create the time sheet from the ‘Select an Employee to fill the Time Sheet’ drop-down list. The system refreshes and displays the name of the company under Assignments field for which the selected employee is working. All rows in the Time Sheet form, displays Date and the respective Day under Date Column drop down list. The first row always displays the Start date, and day of the week; the second row displays the second day, and date of the week etc goes on till the last day, and date of that week. Incase, if you want to enter more task details for any particular day, you can add an additional row by clicking on the ‘Add Row’ link. To delete a row, you need to select the particular row in the given check box, and click on the ‘Delete Row’ link. The Assignments drop-down list displays the name of the Assignment ID, followed by Assignment Company Name and Assignment Name. If the employee has multiple assignments, then the assignment drop-down list displays the multiple assignments. If the employee has any benefits allocated in HRM – Employee Management, then those benefits will be shown in the Assignments drop-down list. Using the Class column, the user can now specify the class for the newly created time sheet. By default, a class will be selected based on the assignment. The Class drop-down list displays the list of all classes for each assignment selected. The user can also select the required class from the Class drop-down list, if required. The Type drop-down list displays the list of rate types that are added for each assignment. Based on the selected assignment, the respective rate types will be displayed in the Type drop-down list. By default, the Regular, OverTime and DoubleTime options will be provided in the Type drop-down list. You can specify the time sheet hours for an entire date range or for the individual days in the time sheet screen. Select the Billable check box, to bill the number of regular hours and overtime hours worked by the employee. If the Billable checkbox is left unchecked, then the regular hours and overtime hours worked by the employee will not be accounted for that particular day. The Billable checkbox will be automatically disabled, if you select any benefits for the employees. Note: The Billable checkbox will be disabled for all the Admin Staff employees. The total number of hours worked by the employee will be automatically shown in the Hours field. You can enter any remarks concerning the prepared time sheet in the Remarks textarea. You have the facility to upload any other file format as a proof to support the generated Time Sheet through the application. To upload a separate Time Sheet, click on the ‘Browse’button to locate the file from your computer. The Uploaded Time Sheet File field displays the navigation path of the uploaded file. You need to click on the ‘Submit’ link after entering the details in the Time Sheet form. The screen refreshes by displaying the Time Sheet Home page, which shows the entered new time sheet record. The submitted New Time Sheet record added by you will be sent to the respective employee with the status as submitted.  Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel, and return to previous page. Note: When you specify the time sheet hours for full date range and click on Submit link in the Add New Time Sheet screen. The system displays the following alert message:   Creating Multiple Time Sheets The “Create Multiple Timesheets” link allows you to create time sheets for multiple employees at a time. You can select a date range of any period to create time sheets for the employees. To create multiple time sheets, do the following: Click on Create Multiple Timesheets link available in the Time Sheets home page. The system displays the following alert message: The following screen will appear after selecting 'OK' in the above screen: By default, the above screen will not display any employee record(s) and the date range will be the default current week. You can select the date range of any period to create new time sheets. The date range can vary from a day to a year. You can select an employee from the “Select an Employee” drop-down list individually and add them to the new time sheet form. Only HRM Employees will be shown in the“Select an Employee” drop-down list. You can also have an option to search and select the employees from the “Search and Select Employees List” link. To search and select the employees, click on the “Search and Select Employees List”link. The system refreshes and displays the Search and Select Employees screen as shown below: You can filter the employee list by several options or by employee name. You can add unlimited number of employees to the list. The Filter Employee List By field contains the following options: Assignment Companies Internal Direct Internal Temp/Contract Temp Contract By default, the search icon will not be displayed beside the Filter Employee List By drop-down list. When you select the Assignment Companies option from the drop-down list, then the search icon will be displayed. You can click on the Add all to the list link to select the whole list and add it to theSelected Employees section. You can also filter the employees by Assignment Company or Employee Type. You can enter the name of the employee in the Employee Name text box and click onSearch icon for a quick search based on filtered employees. Once you are finished with searching and selecting the employees, click on the Create Listlink to create a new list for the employees to create time sheets. Click on the Cancel link to cancel and return back to New Time sheet screen. You have to select the assignment or benefits for the employees from the fields available under the Assignments column in the new time sheet screen. Enter the number of hours for the selected date range. When you enter the hours for an employee, then those hours will be included when submitting the Time Sheets and vice versa. Once you are finished with specifying the assignment or benefits and entering the hours for the employee. Click on the Submit link to submit the time sheet. The system refreshes by submitting the time sheet. The status of the submitted time sheet will be pending for Approval. Click on the Submit & Approve link to submit the time sheet with an automatic approval. When you submit multiple time sheets for multiple employees, the system creates separate time sheets for each employee. Click on the Cancel link to cancel and return back to Time Sheet home page screen. Note 1: When you edit a submitted time sheet (Create Multiple Timesheet), then the line items (rows) edited by you only will be submitted after its submission. This condition will be applicable when you submit the time sheet by using Submit link. Whereas in case of Submit & Approve link, the system approves all the line items (rows) irrespective of the line items (rows) edited. Approve Submitted Time Sheets The Time Sheet Home Page displays all of the records that have been submitted by the employees for your approval. Hence, you can find all the submitted Time Sheet records sent by the employees who are currently working on an assignment. To view the details of the submitted time sheets, double-click on the individual records available in the Time Sheets home page. The Submitted Timesheets screen displays the list of submitted timesheets of the employee. You can double-click on a record to view the details of the submitted timesheet. The From field and the To field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the duration from, which date the Time Sheet of the selected employee is available. You can also change the duration of the Time Sheets from From and To fields and click on the View link available beside the calendar icon. The system refreshes by displaying the Time Sheet details of the selected employee based on the duration specified. You can select the required submitted timesheet and click on Approve link to approve the timesheet You can approve multiple timesheets at a time. Click on the Delete link to delete the selected time sheet. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to go back to previous page. Note: You cannot delete the time sheets that are billed or partially billed. Details of Submitted Time Sheets To view the details of the submitted timesheets, double-click on a record in the Submitted Timesheets home page. The system refreshes and displays the time sheet screen with the following details: The screen displays the name of the selected employee, and the submitted Time Sheet duration in the top right corner of the page. You will find check boxes to each line item in the time sheet screen. This check boxes allow you to approve multiple line items in the time sheet screen. You can also reject multiple line items so that these rejected items will not be sent for invoicing. The Approved By column displays different statuses based on the line items approved by you in the time sheets. The name of the approved user will be displayed in parenthesis. If the time sheet is approved in Accounting->Time Sheets, then it displays the status of the line item as “Accounting (Name of the approved user)”. If the time sheet is approved by the self-service user, then it displays the status as “Self-Service (Name of the self service user)”. If the time sheet is waiting to be set a new status, then it displays the status as “Pending”. If the time sheet is rejected by the user, then it displays the status as “Rejected”. You can approve/reject all the line items to change the status of any pending line item in order to invoice. The Approved Timesheet section displays the list of line items (rows) that are approved by you for the selected timesheet. The person who will approve or reject the Time sheet of the employee, will write his comments in the Notes textarea. The screen also has four links, which can be seen in the provided strip bar. The links are ‘Approve’, ‘Reject’, ‘Edit’, and ‘Cancel’. If the submitted Time Sheet by the employee is meeting the expectations of you, then you can click on the ‘Approve’ link in order to approve the Time Sheet. Result: The screen refreshes by after approving the Time Sheet. The approved Time Sheet of the employee can be found in the ‘Approved Time Sheet’ link. See the Approved Time Sheet topic for more details. You can reject the Time Sheet submitted by the employee, by clicking on the ‘Reject’ link. Result: The screen refreshes by deleting the submitted Time Sheet of the employee. If any of the submitted Time Sheets by the employees are rejected by you, the message is automatically passed on to the concerned employee stating in the Status field as Rejected by Accounts. You can edit the details of the submitted Time Sheet by clicking on the ‘Edit’ link. See the Edit Submitted Time Sheet topic for more details. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel, and return to previous page. HISTORY OF TIME SHEETS: You can track the history of changes made in Time Sheets. The tracked changes will be displayed based on the following conditions: When you edit or reject a time sheet, the system tracks the history of the full time sheet. When you re-submit the time sheet, then the history will be shown within the timesheet at the very bottom: Each link represents a time when the timesheet was edited: Edit Submitted Time Sheet The edit option is a very important feature in Time Sheet, which allows you to edit the details of the submitted Time Sheet by the employee. You can edit the details of the submitted Time Sheet by clicking on the ‘Edit’ link. The screen refreshes by displaying the form, in which you can edit the submitted time sheet. Make the required changes and click on Submit to save the new changes. This will bring the time sheet changes back to the main Time Sheet screen where you can approve the time sheet by clicking on the check box on the left hand side next to the time sheet and then updating the status to approved by clicking on the Update Status button in the gray bar. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel, and return to previous page if necessary. Viewing Approved Time Sheets The Approved Time Sheets screen allows users to view the details of the approved time sheets, and edit any time sheets that may be incorrect that have not already been billed. NOTE: Time sheets that have been billed cannot be edited unless the invoice is removed from Invoice History and brought back to Create Invoices.  This will enabled the Edit option under the Approved Time Sheet screen and will allow users to make changes to the time sheets and regenerate the invoice with the correct amount. To view the approved time sheets, do the following: Click on the Approved Time Sheet link in the Time Sheets home page. The system displays the list of approved time sheets of the employees. Records of Approved Time Sheets You can view all the particulars of the approved time sheets of an employee, by double clicking on the desired employees’ Time Sheet record. The Time Sheet screen refreshes, and shows the list of approved timesheets, for that particular selected employee. The refreshed screen displays the following details: Once you double click the individual records of the employee, the screen refreshes by displaying the list of Time Sheets approved for that selected employee. The selected employee’s name is mentioned in the top right corner of the screen. The From field and the To field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the duration, from which date the Approved Time Sheet of that employee is available. You can also edit the duration of the Approved Time Sheets from the From and To fields and click on the View link, available beside the calendar icon. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the Time Sheet details of the selected employee based on the duration specified. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to go back to previous page. Click on the Delete link to delete the selected time sheet. To view the Time Sheet details of the approved records, double click on the desired record. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the entire particulars of the approved Time Sheet. Note: You cannot delete the time sheets that are billed or partially billed. Approved Time Sheet Details You can view and edit the details of the Approved Time Sheets of the employees, who have submitted their Time Sheets for approval. NOTE: Time sheets that have already been billed cannot be edited.  The invoice will have to be removed and sent back to Create Invoices in order for the Edit option to appear back on the time sheets. To view and edit the Time Sheet details of the approved records, double click on the desired record in the Approved Timesheet section and click on the Edit button in the right hand corner.  This will refresh the screen and all fields will become editable. The refreshed screen will show the following details: The name of the selected employee, and the date and time of submission of the Time Sheet, on the top right corner of the page, all other assignment information, as well as the hours (regular, overtime and double time). If you wish to print the time sheet, you do not have to click on the Edit button, as there will be a button/icon next to Edit called Print.  Click on the “Print” link to print the approved time sheet screen. The system refreshes and displays the time sheet screen in print mode as shown below: Set the required print options and click Print to print the time sheet. The printed time sheet displays the following: Company logo on the top left corner along with the Company Name Employee Name and the date on which time sheet was submitted Send Reminders The Send Reminders feature in Time Sheets allows you to send an email as a reminder to all the active employees who have active assignments and who have not submitted their time sheets. To send a reminder message, perform the below steps: Click on Send Reminders link in the Time Sheets home page. The following pop up message is displayed. In the above message, specify the start date and end date and click onContinue. The Send Reminders screen is displayed. Note: Employees who have not submitted their time sheets in the above specified date range will get the reminder. The Send Reminders screen displays the duration dates selected in the reminders pop up message. You can enter the reminder notes in the field provided and click on Send to send the reminder message. Click on Cancel to ignore the changes made in Send Reminders screen. <p><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Accounting Time sheets Home</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">In the Time Sheet Home Page, you will find the list of time sheets that have been submitted by the employees that still require approval. The submitted Time Sheets need to be reviewed, and then approved by the accountant or HR manager. The employees, who have submitted the Time Sheets, can either be an internal employee, or an employee who is working on an assignment or job order at a client company.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">In the Time Sheet Home Page, you can find the following:</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The <em>From date</em> field and <em>To date</em> field in the top right corner of the screen, where it automatically displays the dates from when the Time Sheets have been submitted by the employees.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">An option to edit the Time Sheet dates from the <em>From</em> and <em>To</em> fields in the top right corner of the screen and click on the <strong>View</strong> link, available beside the calendar icon. The screen refreshes by displaying the Time Sheet details based on the dates specified.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Columns that display the <em>Employee Name, Employee ID, Start Date,End Date, </em>and<em> Total Hours</em> respectively. Each column will have their corresponding record details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The ability to create  New Time Sheets by clicking on the ‘<strong>New Time Sheet’</strong> link, as well as view the approved time sheets by clicking on the ‘<strong>Approved Time Sheets</strong>’ link.  See the<a href="http://help.akken.com/help-articles/add-new-time-sheet/" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">New Time Sheet</a> and <a href="http://help.akken.com/help-articles/approve-submitted-time-sheets/" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Approved Time Sheets</a> topics for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the ‘<strong>Send Reminders</strong>’ link in order to remind the employees to submit their weekly time sheets. See the <a href="http://help.akken.com/help-articles/send-reminders/" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Send Reminders</a> topic for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Approve or reject multiple employees’   time sheets at a time using the <strong>Update Status</strong> link available in the Time Sheets home page.</span></li> </ol><h2 style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 15px; color: rgb(89, 90, 92);"><br></h2><h2 style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: x-large;"><strong>APPROVING/REJECTING MULTIPLE TIME SHEETS</strong></span></h2><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">To approve/reject time sheets of multiple employees, do the following:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">1.  Select the required employee(s) time sheets and click on <strong>Update Status</strong> link. The system displays the<strong>Update Status for TimeSheet(s)</strong> screen as shown below:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> </p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">2.  In the above screen,</span></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">Select the <strong>Approve selected Employee(s) Timesheet(s)</strong> option if you wish to approve the time sheets.</span></li> <li><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">Select the <strong>Reject selected Employee(s) Timesheet(s)</strong> option if you wish to reject the time sheets.</span></li> <li><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">You can also enter the notes while accepting or rejecting the timesheets in the <strong>Notes</strong> text area.</span></li> <li><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">Once you have specified the details, click on <strong>Update Status</strong> to update the status of the employee time sheets.</span></li> <li><span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-size: large;">Click <strong>Cancel</strong> to cancel the <strong>Update Status for TimeSheet(s) </strong>screen.</span></li> </ul><div><font color="#000000"><br></font></div><div><font><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: x-large;">Add a New Time Sheet</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">You can create a new time sheet for your temporary staff employees who have not submitted their timesheets. You can also create a time sheet for yourself or other internal staff members, if required. Time sheets are used to enter the number of hours worked by the employee during the work week. You can create a time sheet for any date range i.e. from a day to a year.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To create a new time sheet, do the following:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">Click on <strong>New Timesheet</strong> link available in the <strong>Time Sheets</strong> home page. The system displays the <strong>Add New Time Sheet</strong> screen as shown below:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502512/original/OG8rQY_tOzE39sNEzeorD_LvJGY_7i7Fhw?1501078477" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502512/original/OG8rQY_tOzE39sNEzeorD_LvJGY_7i7Fhw?1501078477" data-fileid="4041502512" data-uniquekey="1501078405628"></p> <br><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">In the above screen:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The start date of the time sheet is displayed by default in the top right corner of the Time Sheet. If the date range needs to be updated to a different time frame you can use calendar icon<img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image009.jpg" alt="" class="fr-dii fr-draggable" style="width: 16px; height: 16px;"> to adjust the to and from dates. The screen will refresh, and generates a New Time Sheet Screen, which allows you to fill the Time Sheet details for 7 consecutive days, starting from the start date specified.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can select any date range to create new time sheets. You can also have an option to enter hours for the entire date range selected at the top of the screen or you can enter in time per day using the multiple rows listed.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Time Sheet screen has four links in the provided strip bar: <strong>‘Add Row’, ‘Delete Row’, ‘Submit’, and ‘Cancel’ </strong>links respectively.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The details of the time sheets are displayed under the following columns: Date, Assignments, Class, Type, Hours and Billable columns respectively. The <strong>Task Details</strong> field is displayed below the <strong>Assignments</strong> column.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Enter the details of the tasks performed by the employee in the Task Details field.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Select an employee for whom you want to create the time sheet from the ‘Select an Employee to fill the Time Sheet’ drop-down list. The system refreshes and displays the name of the company under Assignments field for which the selected employee is working.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">All rows in the Time Sheet form, displays Date and the respective Day under <em>Date</em> Column drop down list. The first row always displays the Start date, and day of the week; the second row displays the second day, and date of the week etc goes on till the last day, and date of that week.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Incase, if you want to enter more task details for any particular day, you can add an additional row by clicking on the<strong> </strong><strong>‘Add Row’ </strong>link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">To delete a row, you need to select the particular row in the given check box, and click on the <strong>‘Delete Row’</strong> link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Assignments drop-down list displays the name of the Assignment ID, followed by Assignment Company Name and Assignment Name. If the employee has multiple assignments, then the assignment drop-down list displays the multiple assignments. If the employee has any benefits allocated in HRM – Employee Management, then those benefits will be shown in the <strong>Assignments</strong> drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Using the Class column, the user can now specify the class for the newly created time sheet. By default, a class will be selected based on the assignment. The Class drop-down list displays the list of all classes for each assignment selected. The user can also select the required class from the Class drop-down list, if required.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Type drop-down list displays the list of rate types that are added for each assignment. Based on the selected assignment, the respective rate types will be displayed in the Type drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">By default, the Regular, OverTime and DoubleTime options will be provided in the Type drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can specify the time sheet hours for an entire date range or for the individual days in the time sheet screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Select the Billable check box, to bill the number of regular hours and overtime hours worked by the employee. If the Billable checkbox is left unchecked, then the regular hours and overtime hours worked by the employee will not be accounted for that particular day.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Billable checkbox will be automatically disabled, if you select any benefits for the employees.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><strong>Note</strong>: The <strong>Billable</strong> checkbox will be disabled for all the <strong>Admin Staff</strong> employees.</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The total number of hours worked by the employee will be automatically shown in the Hours field.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can enter any remarks concerning the prepared time sheet in the Remarks textarea.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You have the facility to upload any other file format as a proof to support the generated Time Sheet through the application. To upload a separate Time Sheet, click on the ‘<strong>Browse’</strong>button to locate the file from your computer.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Uploaded Time Sheet File field displays the navigation path of the uploaded file.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You need to click on the <strong>‘Submit’ </strong>link after entering the details in the Time Sheet form. The screen refreshes by displaying the Time Sheet Home page, which shows the entered new time sheet record.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The submitted New Time Sheet record added by you will be sent to the respective employee with the status as submitted.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;"> Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’ </strong>link to cancel, and return to previous page.</span></li> </ol> <h6 style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><b style="font-size: large;">Note:</b></h6> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><h6><b style="font-size: large;">When you specify the time sheet hours for full date range and click on Submit link in the Add New Time Sheet screen. The system displays the following alert message:</b></h6></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502591/original/dOXdYQzaZTbIHPTdoFuC3Y_EFAvQeDoRaw?1501078597" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502591/original/dOXdYQzaZTbIHPTdoFuC3Y_EFAvQeDoRaw?1501078597" data-fileid="4041502591" data-uniquekey="1501078405628"></p> <h6 style="font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Creating Multiple Time Sheets</b></h6> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The <strong>“Create Multiple Timesheets”</strong> link allows you to create time sheets for multiple employees at a time. You can select a date range of any period to create time sheets for the employees.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To create multiple time sheets, do the following:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on <strong>Create Multiple Timesheets</strong> link available in the <strong>Time Sheets</strong> home page. The system displays the following alert message:</span></li></ol> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502591/original/dOXdYQzaZTbIHPTdoFuC3Y_EFAvQeDoRaw?1501078597" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502591/original/dOXdYQzaZTbIHPTdoFuC3Y_EFAvQeDoRaw?1501078597" data-fileid="4041502591" data-uniquekey="1501078405628"> </div><div><span style='font-family: "Times New Roman", Times, serif; font-size: 18px;'>The following screen will appear after selecting 'OK' in the above screen:</span></div><div> <span style='font-family: "Times New Roman", Times, serif; font-size: 18px;'><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502805/original/kTtuO7RrythyrYufxYMNTh8Irs37-E0nfA?1501078843" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502805/original/kTtuO7RrythyrYufxYMNTh8Irs37-E0nfA?1501078843" data-fileid="4041502805" data-uniquekey="1501078405628"></span><br><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">By default, the above screen will not display any employee record(s) and the date range will be the default current week. You can select the date range of any period to create new time sheets. The date range can vary from a day to a year.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can select an employee from the <strong>“Select an Employee”</strong> drop-down list individually and add them to the new time sheet form. Only HRM Employees will be shown in the<strong>“Select an Employee”</strong> drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can also have an option to search and select the employees from the <strong>“Search and Select Employees List”</strong> link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">To search and select the employees, click on the <strong>“Search and Select Employees List”</strong>link. The system refreshes and displays the Search and Select Employees screen as shown below:</span></li> </ol> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502865/original/jmqC--pvT4vAaPqKMWSfL7s-pmY0ZvJEuA?1501078896" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502865/original/jmqC--pvT4vAaPqKMWSfL7s-pmY0ZvJEuA?1501078896" data-fileid="4041502865" data-uniquekey="1501078405628"><br><ol> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can filter the employee list by several options or by employee name. You can add unlimited number of employees to the list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The <strong>Filter Employee List By</strong> field contains the following options:</span></li> </ol> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li> <br><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;" type="disc"> <li><b style="font-size: large;">Assignment Companies</b></li> <li><b style="font-size: large;">Internal Direct</b></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Internal Temp/Contract</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Temp Contract</span></li> </ul> </li></ul> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">By default, the search icon will not be displayed beside the <strong>Filter Employee List By</strong> drop-down list. When you select the <strong>Assignment Companies</strong> option from the drop-down list, then the search icon will be displayed.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can click on the <strong>Add all to the list</strong> link to select the whole list and add it to the<strong>Selected Employees</strong> section. You can also filter the employees by Assignment Company or Employee Type.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can enter the name of the employee in the <em>Employee Name</em> text box and click on<strong>Search</strong> icon for a quick search based on filtered employees.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Once you are finished with searching and selecting the employees, click on the <strong>Create List</strong>link to create a new list for the employees to create time sheets.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>Cancel</strong> link to cancel and return back to New Time sheet screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You have to select the assignment or benefits for the employees from the fields available under the Assignments column in the new time sheet screen. Enter the number of hours for the selected date range.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">When you enter the hours for an employee, then those hours will be included when submitting the Time Sheets and vice versa.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Once you are finished with specifying the assignment or benefits and entering the hours for the employee. Click on the <strong>Submit</strong> link to submit the time sheet. The system refreshes by submitting the time sheet. The status of the submitted time sheet will be pending for Approval.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>Submit &amp; Approve</strong> link to submit the time sheet with an automatic approval.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">When you submit multiple time sheets for multiple employees, the system creates separate time sheets for each employee.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>Cancel</strong> link to cancel and return back to Time Sheet home page screen.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: large;">Note 1: </b><span style="font-size: 18px; line-height: 1.3;">When you edit a submitted time sheet (Create Multiple Timesheet), then the line items (rows) edited by you only will be submitted after its submission. This condition will be applicable when you submit the time sheet by using Submit link.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">Whereas in case of <strong>Submit &amp; Approve</strong> link, the system approves all the line items (rows) irrespective of the line items (rows) edited.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"></span></p> <div><font color="#4a4a4a"><br></font></div> </div><div><font><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Approve Submitted Time Sheets</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The Time Sheet Home Page displays all of the records that have been submitted by the employees for your approval. Hence, you can find all the submitted Time Sheet records sent by the employees who are currently working on an assignment.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To view the details of the submitted time sheets, double-click on the individual records available in the Time Sheets home page.</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Submitted Timesheets screen displays the list of submitted timesheets of the employee. You can double-click on a record to view the details of the submitted timesheet.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The From field and the To field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the duration from, which date the Time Sheet of the selected employee is available.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can also change the duration of the Time Sheets from <em>From</em> and <em>To</em> fields and click on the <strong>View</strong> link available beside the calendar icon. The system refreshes by displaying the Time Sheet details of the selected employee based on the duration specified.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can select the required submitted timesheet and click on <strong>Approve</strong> link to approve the timesheet You can approve multiple timesheets at a time.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>Delete</strong> link to delete the selected time sheet.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’</strong> link to go back to previous page.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><strong>Note</strong>: You cannot delete the time sheets that are billed or partially billed.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Details of Submitted Time Sheets</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To view the details of the submitted timesheets, double-click on a record in the Submitted Timesheets home page. The system refreshes and displays the time sheet screen with the following details:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The screen displays the name of the selected employee, and the submitted Time Sheet duration in the top right corner of the page.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You will find check boxes to each line item in the time sheet screen. This check boxes allow you to approve multiple line items in the time sheet screen. You can also reject multiple line items so that these rejected items will not be sent for invoicing.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Approved By column displays different statuses based on the line items approved by you in the time sheets. The name of the approved user will be displayed in parenthesis.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">If the time sheet is approved in Accounting-&gt;Time Sheets, then it displays the status of the line item as “Accounting (Name of the approved user)”.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">If the time sheet is approved by the self-service user, then it displays the status as “Self-Service (Name of the self service user)”.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">If the time sheet is waiting to be set a new status, then it displays the status as “Pending”.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">If the time sheet is rejected by the user, then it displays the status as “Rejected”.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can approve/reject all the line items to change the status of any pending line item in order to invoice.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Approved Timesheet section displays the list of line items (rows) that are approved by you for the selected timesheet.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The person who will approve or reject the Time sheet of the employee, will write his comments in the Notes textarea.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The screen also has four links, which can be seen in the provided strip bar. The links are ‘Approve’, ‘Reject’, ‘Edit’, and ‘Cancel’.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">If the submitted Time Sheet by the employee is meeting the expectations of you, then you can click on the ‘Approve’ link in order to approve the Time Sheet. Result: The screen refreshes by after approving the Time Sheet.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The approved Time Sheet of the employee can be found in the ‘Approved Time Sheet’ link. See the Approved Time Sheet topic for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can reject the Time Sheet submitted by the employee, by clicking on the ‘Reject’ link. Result: The screen refreshes by deleting the submitted Time Sheet of the employee.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">If any of the submitted Time Sheets by the employees are rejected by you, the message is automatically passed on to the concerned employee stating in the Status field as Rejected by Accounts.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can edit the details of the submitted Time Sheet by clicking on the ‘Edit’ link. See the Edit Submitted Time Sheet topic for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel, and return to previous page.</span></li> </ol> <h2 style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);"><strong>HISTORY OF TIME SHEETS:</strong></span></h2> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can track the history of changes made in Time Sheets. The tracked changes will be displayed based on the following conditions:</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">When you edit or reject a time sheet, the system tracks the history of the full time sheet.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">When you re-submit the time sheet, then the history will be shown within the timesheet at the very bottom:</span></li> </ol> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503015/original/tl8ZYjwuCtudAomVfNM1oH_j5zq-noYlvg?1501079127" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503015/original/tl8ZYjwuCtudAomVfNM1oH_j5zq-noYlvg?1501079127" data-fileid="4041503015" data-uniquekey="1501078405628"> </div><div><span style='font-family: "Times New Roman", Times, serif; font-size: 18px;'>Each link represents a time when the timesheet was edited:</span></div><div> <span style='font-family: "Times New Roman", Times, serif; font-size: 18px;'><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503086/original/SluZnH71UIwDghAwvi2tUMm5An9ZpBAWWA?1501079211" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503086/original/SluZnH71UIwDghAwvi2tUMm5An9ZpBAWWA?1501079211" data-fileid="4041503086" data-uniquekey="1501078405628"></span><br><div><font><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Edit Submitted Time Sheet</b></font></div> </div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The edit option is a very important feature in Time Sheet, which allows you to edit the details of the submitted Time Sheet by the employee.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">You can edit the details of the submitted Time Sheet by clicking on the <strong>‘Edit’</strong> link. The screen refreshes by displaying the form, in which you can edit the submitted time sheet.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">Make the required changes and click on Submit to save the new changes.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">This will bring the time sheet changes back to the main Time Sheet screen where you can approve the time sheet by clicking on the check box on the left hand side next to the time sheet and then updating the status to approved by clicking on the Update Status button in the gray bar.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’</strong> link to cancel, and return to previous page if necessary.</span></p> </div><div><font color="#000000"><br></font></div><div><font><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Viewing Approved Time Sheets</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The Approved Time Sheets screen allows users to view the details of the approved time sheets, and edit any time sheets that may be incorrect that have not already been billed.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: large;">NOTE: Time sheets that have been billed cannot be edited unless the invoice is removed from Invoice History and brought back to Create Invoices.  This will enabled the Edit option under the Approved Time Sheet screen and will allow users to make changes to the time sheets and regenerate the invoice with the correct amount.</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To view the approved time sheets, do the following:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>Approved Time Sheet</strong> link in the Time Sheets home page. The system displays the list of approved time sheets of the employees.</span></p> </div><div><font color="#000000"><br></font></div><div><font><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Records of Approved Time Sheets</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">You can view all the particulars of the approved time sheets of an employee, by double clicking on the desired employees’ Time Sheet record. The Time Sheet screen refreshes, and shows the list of approved timesheets, for that particular selected employee.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The refreshed screen displays the following details:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Once you double click the individual records of the employee, the screen refreshes by displaying the list of Time Sheets approved for that selected employee.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The selected employee’s name is mentioned in the top right corner of the screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The From field and the To field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the duration, from which date the Approved Time Sheet of that employee is available.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can also edit the duration of the Approved Time Sheets from the <em>From</em> and <em>To</em> fields and click on the <strong>View</strong> link, available beside the calendar icon. <em>Result:</em> The screen refreshes by displaying the Time Sheet details of the selected employee based on the duration specified.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’</strong> link to go back to previous page.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>Delete</strong> link to delete the selected time sheet.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">To view the Time Sheet details of the approved records, double click on the desired record. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the entire particulars of the approved Time Sheet.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><strong>Note: You cannot delete the time sheets that are billed or partially billed.</strong></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Approved Time Sheet Details</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">You can view and edit the details of the Approved Time Sheets of the employees, who have submitted their Time Sheets for approval.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: large;">NOTE: Time sheets that have already been billed cannot be edited.  The invoice will have to be removed and sent back to Create Invoices in order for the Edit option to appear back on the time sheets.</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To view and edit the Time Sheet details of the approved records, double click on the desired record in the Approved Timesheet section and click on the Edit button in the right hand corner.  This will refresh the screen and all fields will become editable.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The refreshed screen will show the following details:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The name of the selected employee, and the date and time of submission of the Time Sheet, on the top right corner of the page, all other assignment information, as well as the hours (regular, overtime and double time).</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">If you wish to print the time sheet, you do not have to click on the Edit button, as there will be a button/icon next to Edit called Print.  Click on the <strong>“Print”</strong> link to print the approved time sheet screen. The system refreshes and displays the time sheet screen in print mode as shown below:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503209/original/ghQ4IWKD5f4z7tkQxT0mf6xf1ddCryQFLg?1501079358" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503209/original/ghQ4IWKD5f4z7tkQxT0mf6xf1ddCryQFLg?1501079358" data-fileid="4041503209" data-uniquekey="1501078405628"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Set the required print options and click <strong>Print</strong> to print the time sheet.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The printed time sheet displays the following:</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Company logo on the top left corner along with the Company Name</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Employee Name and the date on which time sheet was submitted</span></li> </ol> <div><font><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Send Reminders</b></font></div> <div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The <strong>Send Reminders</strong> feature in <strong>Time Sheets</strong> allows you to send an email as a reminder to all the active employees who have active assignments and who have not submitted their time sheets.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To send a reminder message, perform the below steps:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on <strong>Send Reminders</strong> link in the Time Sheets home page. The following pop up message is displayed.</span></li></ol> <img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502238/original/i1ux4rOhamJMlvMnl8oOVkw7KmajVx6CWw?1501078126" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502238/original/i1ux4rOhamJMlvMnl8oOVkw7KmajVx6CWw?1501078126" data-fileid="4041502238" data-uniquekey="1501078106124" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"><br><br><ol><li><span style="font-size: large;">In the above message, specify the start date and end date and click on<strong>Continue</strong>. The <strong>Send Reminders </strong>screen is displayed.</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><strong>Note</strong>: Employees who have not submitted their time sheets in the above specified date range will get the reminder.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"></span></p> <img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502272/original/hbfMkFzlIgmrVgwKVyGrgFDGMRo3Un62bw?1501078164" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041502272/original/hbfMkFzlIgmrVgwKVyGrgFDGMRo3Un62bw?1501078164" data-fileid="4041502272" data-uniquekey="1501078106124" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Send Reminders screen displays the duration dates selected in the reminders pop up message. You can enter the reminder notes in the field provided and click on <strong>Send</strong> to send the reminder message.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on <strong>Cancel</strong> to ignore the changes made in <strong>Send Reminders</strong> screen.</span></li> </ol> <div><font color="#000000"><br></font></div> </div> <div><font color="#000000"><br></font></div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> </div><div><font color="#4a4a4a"><br></font></div><p><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);"><br></b></p> 266150 3083 4000010475 2017-07-26T10:30:07-04:00 4004241107 4 2 16 9 Accounting - Time sheets 2015-08-24T19:38:53-04:00 12054499 1 2014-04-11T15:26:16-04:00 1 2 Expenses - Home In the Expenses Home Page, you will find the list of expenses records that have been submitted by the employees. The submitted Expenses records need to be reviewed, and can be approved/rejected by you. The employees, who have submitted the Expenses, can either be an Employee of the Organization, or an employee who is working under a Project. In the Expenses Home Page you can find the following: The Expenses Home Page will have the From date field and To date field in the top right corner of the page, where it automatically displays the dates from, when the Expenses have been submitted by the employees. You can even edit the Expenses dates from the From and To fields in the top right corner of the screen and click on View link, available beside the calendar icon. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the Expenses details based on the dates specified. The listed expenses record will have the following columns: ID – Employee Name, Start Date, End Date, ($) Expenses,($) Advance, and ($) Balance. Also, from the Expenses home page, you can create New Expenses by clicking on the ‘New Expenses’ link, and can also see the approved expenses by clicking on the ‘Approved Expenses’ link. You can also approve or reject multiple employees expenses at a time using the Update Status link available in the Expenses home page. See the New Expenses and Approved Expenses topics for more details. See the Paging options topic to know, how to use the paging options displayed at the bottom of the Expenses page.   Approving/Rejecting Multiple Expenses To approve/reject expenses of multiple employees, do the following: Select the required employee(s) expenses and click on Update Status link. The system displays the Update Status for Expenses screen as shown below: In the above screen, Select the Approve selected Employee(s) Expenses option if you wish to approve the expenses. Select the Reject selected Employee(s) Expenses option if you wish to reject the expenses. You can also enter the notes while accepting or rejecting the expenses in the Notes text area. Once you have specified the details, click on Update Status to update the status of the employee expenses. Click Cancel to cancel the Update Status for Expenses screen. Add New Expenses Creating New Expenses in Accounting is primarily for you to create Expenses Sheets for other employees, who have not submitted their Expenses due to various reasons. Also, you can create an Expenses for yourself. You can use the Expenses to enter the amount of expenses spent by the employees of the organization for official reasons. In this way, both you, and the employees will have a clear idea about the expenditure that are spent for the organization. The Expenses can be generated for any particular day, or on a weekly basis. AkkenCloud allows you to enter the expense details in a very convenient manner. You can create New Expenses for yourself, or for other employees from the Expenses home page, by clicking on the ‘New Expenses’ link. The Expenses Home Page refreshes by displaying the New Expenses form that has to be created. To Create New Expenses, follow the steps given below: The start and end date of the expenses is mentioned by default in the top right corner of the Expenses. Also, you can select a new start date by clicking on the calendar icon. Result: The screen refreshes, and generates a New Expenses screen, which allows you to fill the Expenses details. You can even edit the start date and end date of the expenses from the From and To fields and click on the View link, available beside the calendar icon. Result: The screen refreshes, and generates a New Expenses screen, which allows you to fill the Expenses details. You can select the name of the employee, for whom you plan to generate the Expenses by selecting from the drop down menu box ‘Select an Employee to fill the Expenses’. In the Enter Expense Type field, you can enter a new expense type, and click on the ‘Add’link to make the new expense type, a part of Expense Type drop down menu. The Notes field is displayed below the Assignments column. You can either prepare the Expenses for other employees, or for yourself. After selecting the employee name, the screen refreshes by displaying the name of the company and the assignment name, under Customer (Assignment) field, for which the selected employee is working. All rows in the Expenses Sheet form, displays Date and the respective Day under Date Column drop down list. The first row always displays the Start date and day of the expense. Incase, you want to enter more Expense details for any particular day, you can add an additional row by clicking on the ‘Add Row’ link. To delete a row, you need to select the particular row in the given check box, and click on the ‘Delete Row’ link. Under the Assignments column, you can find the drop down list, which allows you to select the company name, for which the employee is working. Select a suitable expenses type from Expense Type drop down list. This field is mandatory. Specify the class for the expense from the Class drop-down list. Enter the reason for the expense, for the selected expense type, in the Notes column. Enter the spent quantity number, in the Quantity column. Enter per unit cost of the expense spent by the employee in the ($) Unit Cost column. The ($) Amount column automatically displays the total expense for that day by multiplying the amount provided in the Quantity column, and ($) Unit Cost column. Select the Billable check box, corresponding to each expense row, to bill the expense spent by the employee. If the Billable checkbox is left unchecked, then the expenses spent by the employee will not be accounted for that particular day. The Billable checkbox will be automatically disabled depending on the employees’ Assignment type. The total expenses spent by the employee will be automatically calculated and shown in the Total Expenses field.  In the Advance Field, you can enter the advance amount given to the employee, if any. The Balance field will automatically display the balance amount to be paid to the employee. You can enter any remarks concerning to the prepared expenses in the Remarks textarea. You have the facility to upload any other file format as a proof to support the generated Expenses through the application. To upload a separate Expenses, click on the ‘Browse’button to locate the file from your computer. The Uploaded Expenses File field displays the navigation path of the uploaded file. You need to click on the ‘Submit’ link after entering the details in the Expenses form, to submit the expenses. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the Expenses Home page, which shows the entered new expenses record. The submitted New Expenses record will be sent to the respective employee with the status as submitted. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel, and return to previous page. Approve Submitted Expenses The Expenses Home Page displays all the expenses records that have been submitted by the employees to you for approval. Hence, you can find all the submitted Expenses records sent by the employees of the organization. In order to view the details of the Expenses submitted by the employee, you can double click on the individual records sent by the employees from the Expenses home page. The Expenses screen refreshes, and shows the list of records submitted by the selected employee. In the above screen: The Submitted Expenses screen displays the list of expenses submitted by the employee. You can double-click on a expense record to view its details. The From field and the To field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the duration from, which date the Time Sheet of that employee is available. You can also change the duration dates of the Expenses from the From and To fields in the top right corner of the screen and click on the View link, available beside the calendar icon.Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the list of expenses submitted by the employee for approval based on the duration specified. To approve a record directly, you need to select the particular record and click on‘Approve’ link. To reject a record directly, you need to select the particular record and click on ‘Reject’link. Click on the Delete link to delete the selected expense record. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to go back to previous page. Note: You cannot delete the expenses that are billed or partially billed. Details of Submitted Expenses To view the details of the submitted expenses, double click on the submitted expense record. The system displays the entire particulars of the expenses submitted by the employee. You can also approve or reject the submitted expenses by the employees using the Approve and Reject links. Edit Submitted Expenses The edit option is a very important feature in Expenses, which allows you to edit the details of the submitted Expenses of the employee. You can edit the details of the submitted Expenses by clicking on the ‘Edit’ link. The screen refreshes by displaying the form, in which you can edit the Expenses. Make the required changes and finally click on Submit to save the new changes Click on Cancel to cancel and return back to previous page. Viewing Approved Expenses AkkenCloud enables you to view all the list of approved Expenses. This feature helps you to know, and allows to keep track of all the approved Expenses of the employees. To view the approved Expenses, click on the ‘Approved Expenses’ link in the Expenses home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the list of approved expenses records of the employees. The refreshed screen displays the following: The From field and the To field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the duration from, which date the Approved Expenses of the employees are available. You can even edit the duration dates of the Approved Expenses from the From and Tofields in the top right corner of the screen, and click on the View link, available beside the calendar icon. The screen refreshes by displaying the list of Approved Expenses records based on the duration specified. Under each column, the respective details are mentioned. For e.g. The Employee Name Column will have the name of the employee. The Start Date, and End Date column will display the period from which the Expenses is provided, etc. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel, and return to the previous page. Records of Approved Expenses You can view all the particulars of the approved expenses of an employee, by double clicking on the desired Expenses record. The Expenses screen refreshes, and shows the list of records approved by you for that particular selected employee. Approved Expenses Details You can view and print all the details of the Approved Expenses of the employees, who have submitted their Expenses for approval. To view and print the Expenses details of the approved records, double click on the desired record. The screen refreshes by displaying the entire particulars of the approved Expenses. The refreshed screen will show the following details: 1. The screen displays the name of the selected employee, and the date and time of submission of the Expenses, on the top right corner of the page. 2. In the Expenses screen, you can find the following columns: Date, Assignment, Expense Type, Quantity, ($) Unit Cost, ($) Amount, Billable and Approved By. The Notes field is displayed below the Assignments column. 3. Under each column, the respective details are mentioned. For e.g. The Date column will have the dates, and the corresponding day. The Assignment Column will have the name of the company and assignment name, for which the employee is working. 4. The History field will display all the details of the Approved Time Sheet. The details include the following field Remarks, Approved User, Date, Status and Notes. 5. Click on the ‘Print’ link, if you want to print the Expenses. 6. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel, and return to previous page. <p><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: x-large;">Expenses - Home</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">In the Expenses Home Page, you will find the list of expenses records that have been submitted by the employees. The submitted Expenses records need to be reviewed, and can be approved/rejected by you. The employees, who have submitted the Expenses, can either be an Employee of the Organization, or an employee who is working under a Project.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">In the Expenses Home Page you can find the following:</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Expenses Home Page will have the <em>From date</em> field and <em>To date</em> field in the top right corner of the page, where it automatically displays the dates from, when the Expenses have been submitted by the employees.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can even edit the Expenses dates from the <em>From</em> and <em>To</em> fields in the top right corner of the screen and click on <strong>View</strong> link, available beside the calendar icon.<em> Result:</em> The screen refreshes by displaying the Expenses details based on the dates specified.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The listed expenses record will have the following columns: ID – <em>Employee Name, Start Date, End Date, ($)</em> <em>Expenses,($) Advance,</em> and <em>($) Balance</em>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Also, from the Expenses home page, you can create New Expenses by clicking on the ‘<strong>New Expenses</strong>’ link, and can also see the approved expenses by clicking on the ‘<strong>Approved Expenses</strong>’ link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can also approve or reject multiple employees expenses at a time using the <strong>Update Status</strong> link available in the Expenses home page.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">See the <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Add_New_Expenses.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">New Expenses</a> and <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Approved_Expenses1.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Approved Expenses</a> topics for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">See the <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Paging_Options.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Paging options</a> topic to know, how to use the paging options displayed at the bottom of the Expenses page.</span></li> </ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> </p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Approving/Rejecting Multiple Expenses</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To approve/reject expenses of multiple employees, do the following:</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: large;">Select the required employee(s) expenses and click on <strong>Update Status</strong> link. The system displays the <strong>Update Status for Expenses </strong>screen as shown below:</span></li></ol><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503364/original/NQyv5jt_MgRiJL5R-Kgi-2XqmwKR-1F00Q?1501079519" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503364/original/NQyv5jt_MgRiJL5R-Kgi-2XqmwKR-1F00Q?1501079519" data-fileid="4041503364" data-uniquekey="1501079447519"></p><ol><li><span style="font-size: large;">In the above screen,</span></li></ol><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Select the <strong>Approve selected Employee(s) Expenses </strong>option if you wish to approve the expenses.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Select the <strong>Reject selected Employee(s) Expenses </strong>option if you wish to reject the expenses.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can also enter the notes while accepting or rejecting the expenses in the <strong>Notes</strong> text area.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Once you have specified the details, click on <strong>Update Status</strong> to update the status of the employee expenses.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click <strong>Cancel</strong> to cancel the <strong>Update Status for Expenses </strong>screen.</span></li> </ul><div><font color="#4a4a4a"><br></font></div><div><font><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Add New Expenses</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">Creating New Expenses in Accounting is primarily for you to create Expenses Sheets for other employees, who have not submitted their Expenses due to various reasons. Also, you can create an Expenses for yourself.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">You can use the Expenses to enter the amount of expenses spent by the employees of the organization for official reasons. In this way, both you, and the employees will have a clear idea about the expenditure that are spent for the organization. The Expenses can be generated for any particular day, or on a weekly basis. <strong>AkkenCloud </strong>allows you to enter the expense details in a very convenient manner.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">You can create New Expenses for yourself, or for other employees from the Expenses home page, by clicking on the<strong> </strong><strong>‘New Expenses’</strong> link. The Expenses Home Page refreshes by displaying the New Expenses form that has to be created.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503387/original/okEcffZB_Bz1vWnYFp8Ky9BfF2gLOlwNXQ?1501079554" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503387/original/okEcffZB_Bz1vWnYFp8Ky9BfF2gLOlwNXQ?1501079554" data-fileid="4041503387" data-uniquekey="1501079447519"></p> <br><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To Create New Expenses, follow the steps given below:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The start and end date of the expenses is mentioned by default in the top right corner of the Expenses. Also, you can select a new start date by clicking on the calendar icon<img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image009.jpg" alt="" class="fr-dii fr-draggable" style="width: 16px; height: 16px;">. Result: The screen refreshes, and generates a New Expenses screen, which allows you to fill the Expenses details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can even edit the start date and end date of the expenses from the <em>From</em> and <em>To</em> fields and click on the <strong>View</strong> link, available beside the calendar icon. <em>Result:</em> The screen refreshes, and generates a New Expenses screen, which allows you to fill the Expenses details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can select the name of the employee, for whom you plan to generate the Expenses by selecting from the drop down menu box ‘Select an Employee to fill the Expenses’.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">In the Enter Expense Type field, you can enter a new expense type, and click on the <strong>‘Add’</strong>link to make the new expense type, a part of Expense Type drop down menu.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Notes field is displayed below the Assignments column.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can either prepare the Expenses for other employees, or for yourself.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">After selecting the employee name, the screen refreshes by displaying the name of the company and the assignment name, under Customer (Assignment) field, for which the selected employee is working.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">All rows in the Expenses Sheet form, displays Date and the respective Day under Date Column drop down list. The first row always displays the Start date and day of the expense.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Incase, you want to enter more Expense details for any particular day, you can add an additional row by clicking on the<strong> ‘Add Row’</strong> link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">To delete a row, you need to select the particular row in the given check box, and click on the <strong>‘Delete Row’</strong> link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Under the Assignments column, you can find the drop down list, which allows you to select the company name, for which the employee is working.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Select a suitable expenses type from Expense Type drop down list. This field is mandatory. Specify the class for the expense from the Class drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Enter the reason for the expense, for the selected expense type, in the Notes column.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Enter the spent quantity number, in the Quantity column.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Enter per unit cost of the expense spent by the employee in the ($) Unit Cost column.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The ($) Amount column automatically displays the total expense for that day by multiplying the amount provided in the Quantity column, and ($) Unit Cost column.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Select the Billable check box, corresponding to each expense row, to bill the expense spent by the employee. If the Billable checkbox is left unchecked, then the expenses spent by the employee will not be accounted for that particular day.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Billable checkbox will be automatically disabled depending on the employees’ Assignment type.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The total expenses spent by the employee will be automatically calculated and shown in the Total Expenses field.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;"> In the Advance Field, you can enter the advance amount given to the employee, if any.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Balance field will automatically display the balance amount to be paid to the employee.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can enter any remarks concerning to the prepared expenses in the Remarks textarea.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You have the facility to upload any other file format as a proof to support the generated Expenses through the application. To upload a separate Expenses, click on the ‘<strong>Browse’</strong>button to locate the file from your computer.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Uploaded Expenses File field displays the navigation path of the uploaded file.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You need to click on the <strong>‘Submit’ </strong>link after entering the details in the Expenses form, to submit the expenses. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the Expenses Home page, which shows the entered new expenses record.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The submitted New Expenses record will be sent to the respective employee with the status as submitted.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’</strong> link to cancel, and return to previous page.</span></li> </ol> <div><font><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Approve Submitted Expenses</b></font></div> </div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The Expenses Home Page displays all the expenses records that have been submitted by the employees to you for approval. Hence, you can find all the submitted Expenses records sent by the employees of the organization.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">In order to view the details of the Expenses submitted by the employee, you can double click on the individual records sent by the employees from the Expenses home page. The Expenses screen refreshes, and shows the list of records submitted by the selected employee.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">In the above screen:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The Submitted Expenses screen displays the list of expenses submitted by the employee. You can double-click on a expense record to view its details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The From field and the To field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the duration from, which date the Time Sheet of that employee is available.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can also change the duration dates of the Expenses from the <em>From</em> and <em>To</em> fields in the top right corner of the screen and click on the <strong>View</strong> link, available beside the calendar icon.<em>Result:</em> The screen refreshes by displaying the list of expenses submitted by the employee for approval based on the duration specified.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">To approve a record directly, you need to select the particular record and click on<strong>‘Approve’</strong> link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">To reject a record directly, you need to select the particular record and click on <strong>‘Reject’</strong>link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>Delete</strong> link to delete the selected expense record.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’</strong> link to go back to previous page.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><strong>Note</strong>: You cannot delete the expenses that are billed or partially billed.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Details of Submitted Expenses</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To view the details of the submitted expenses, double click on the submitted expense record. The system displays the entire particulars of the expenses submitted by the employee.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">You can also approve or reject the submitted expenses by the employees using the <strong>Approve</strong> and <strong>Reject</strong> links.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: x-large;">Edit Submitted Expenses</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The edit option is a very important feature in Expenses, which allows you to edit the details of the submitted Expenses of the employee.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">You can edit the details of the submitted Expenses by clicking on the <strong>‘Edit’</strong> link. The screen refreshes by displaying the form, in which you can edit the Expenses.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">Make the required changes and finally click on <strong>Submit</strong> to save the new changes</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">Click on <strong>Cancel</strong> to cancel and return back to previous page.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Viewing Approved Expenses</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;"><strong>AkkenCloud </strong>enables you to view all the list of approved Expenses. This feature helps you to know, and allows to keep track of all the approved Expenses of the employees.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To view the approved Expenses, click on the <strong>‘Approved Expenses’</strong> link in the Expenses home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the list of approved expenses records of the employees.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The refreshed screen displays the following:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: large;">The From field and the To field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the duration from, which date the Approved Expenses of the employees are available.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">You can even edit the duration dates of the Approved Expenses from the <em>From</em> and <em>To</em>fields in the top right corner of the screen, and click on the<strong> View</strong> link, available beside the calendar icon. The screen refreshes by displaying the list of Approved Expenses records based on the duration specified.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Under each column, the respective details are mentioned. For e.g. The Employee Name Column will have the name of the employee. The Start Date, and End Date column will display the period from which the Expenses is provided, etc.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: large;">Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’ </strong>link to cancel, and return to the previous page.</span></li> </ol> <div><font><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Records of Approved Expenses</b></font></div> <div> <p><span style="color: rgb(74, 74, 74); font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: large;">You can view all the particulars of the approved expenses of an employee, by double clicking on the desired Expenses record. The Expenses screen refreshes, and shows the list of records approved by you for that particular selected employee.</span></p> <p><span style="color: rgb(74, 74, 74); font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px;"><br></span></p> <p><span style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);"><strong>Approved Expenses Details</strong></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">You can view and print all the details of the Approved Expenses of the employees, who have submitted their Expenses for approval.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">To view and print the Expenses details of the approved records, double click on the desired record. The screen refreshes by displaying the entire particulars of the approved Expenses.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">The refreshed screen will show the following details:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">1. The screen displays the name of the selected employee, and the date and time of submission of the Expenses, on the top right corner of the page.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">2. In the Expenses screen, you can find the following columns: Date, Assignment, Expense Type, Quantity, ($) Unit Cost, ($) Amount, Billable and Approved By. The Notes field is displayed below the Assignments column.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">3. Under each column, the respective details are mentioned. For e.g. The Date column will have the dates, and the corresponding day. The Assignment Column will have the name of the company and assignment name, for which the employee is working.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">4. The History field will display all the details of the Approved Time Sheet. The details include the following field Remarks, Approved User, Date, Status and Notes.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">5. Click on the <strong>‘Print’</strong> link, if you want to print the Expenses.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: large;">6. Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’</strong> link to cancel, and return to previous page.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> </div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> </div> 266150 577 4000010477 2017-07-26T11:54:41-04:00 4004241107 5 2 1 2 Accounting - Expenses 2015-08-21T04:41:08-04:00 12054499 1 2014-04-11T15:36:43-04:00 1 0 Chart of Accounts Chart of Accounts The accounting process is centered on the Chart of Accounts. This is accessed from the ‘Accounts’ menu (which is the landing page of the Accounting module). The Chart of Accounts is a list of the Company’s business accounts and their balances. This list gives an overview of the financial standing of the Company (further categorized by Location and Department). There are nine types of accounts that can be created. 1.      Asset                                (balance sheet account †) 2.      Accounts Receivable          (balance sheet account †) 3.      Accounts Payable              (balance sheet account †) 4.      Liability                              (balance sheet account†) 5.      Equity                                (balance sheet account †) 6.      Income                               (P&L account ‡) 7.      Miscellaneous Income         (P&L account ‡) 8.      Expense                             (P&L account ‡) 9.      Miscellaneous Expense       (P&L account ‡)   †Balance sheet accounts: These accounts appear on the balance sheet. ‡Profit and Loss accounts: These accounts are used to track your income and expense (accrual basis).   Balance Sheet Accounts (Double Entry) ASSETS, LIABILITIES, AND EQUITY Assets are what you own. Liabilities are what you owe. Equity is what’s left over. It is your net worth. Assets always equal your liabilities plus equity. If assets are less than liabilities then your equity is negative. Assets are on the left of the balance sheet; liabilities and equity are on the right. This directly corresponds to debits and credits. Debits mean left; credits mean right.   Profit and Loss Accounts (Accrual Basis)   Journal Entries Journal is a record that keeps accounting transactions in chronological order, i.e. as they occur.   Assets: As assets are placed on the debit side so initial entry of asset is obviously debited. Increase in asset will be debited and decrease in it will be credited. Liabilities:  As liabilities are recorded on credit side so initial entries of liabilities are credited. Increase in liabilities will be credited and decrease in it will be debited. Capital or Owner’s Equity:  As capital is a liability of the business so rule for liability will be applied for it. Income:  Income and profits result into increase in capital which is liability, and increase in liability is credited thus increase in income will be credited and decrease in income will be debited. Expenses or Losses:  Expenses result into decrease in capital consequently it is a decrease in liability, thus increase in expenses and losses will be debited and decreases in expenses will be credited.   Following are the rules of Debit and Credit Debit:  Increase in asset, Increase in expenses/losses, Decrease in liabilities, Decrease in capital/ownership, Decrease in revenue/income. Credit:  Decrease in assets, Decrease in Expenses, Increase in liabilities, Increase in revenue/income, Increase in capital/ownership Retained Earnings What Does Retained Earnings Mean? The percentage of net earnings not paid out as dividends, but retained by the company to be reinvested in its core business or to pay debt. It is recorded under shareholders’ equity on the balance sheet. The formula calculates retained earnings by adding net income to (or subtracting any net losses from) beginning retained earnings and subtracting any dividends paid to shareholders: Also known as “retention ratio” or “retained surplus”. Investopedia explains Retained Earnings In most cases; companies retain their earnings in order to invest them into areas where the company can create growth opportunities, such as buying new machinery or spending the money on more research and development. Should a net loss be greater than beginning retained earnings, retained earnings can become negative, creating a deficit. The retained earnings general ledger account is adjusted every time a journal entry is made to an income or expense account.   Setting Up Chart of Accounts   Default Accounts* are created when the Company is setup. *The Default Accounts are created under the Default Location (a default ID of 100 is assigned and can be changed as suitable, the name is entered while setting up the company) and Default Department (a default ID of 100 is assigned and can be changed as suitable, the name is Administrative). The Account Numbers cannot be changed. Name Type Base Type Loc Code Dept.Code Account Number Series Accounts Receivable Accounts Receivable Assets 100 100 100-100-1001 1000 Other Current Asset Asset Asset 100 100 100-100-1002 1000 Undeposited Funds Asset Asset 100 100 100-100-1003 1000 Other Current Liability Liability Liability    100 100 100-100-2002 2000 Taxes Payable Liability Liability 100 100 100-100-2003 2000 Payroll Liabilities Liability Liability 100 100 100-100-2004 2000 Accounts Payable Accounts Payable Liability 100 100 100-100-2001 2000 Opening Balance Equity Equity Equity 100 100 100-100-3001 3000 Service/Customer Income Income Income 100 100 100-100-4001 4000 Uncategorized Income Miscellaneous Income Income 100 100 100-100-7001 7000 Payroll Expenses Expense Expense 100 100 100-100-6002 6000 Consulting/Vendor Expenses Expense Expense 100 100 100-100-6001 6000 Uncategorized Expenses Miscellaneous Expense Expense 100 100 100-100-8001 8000 Note: The Bank Accounts and Credit Card Accounts can be created from the Banking section.   Transfer Funds The Transfer Funds link allows you to transfer the funds from one account to another account. To transfers the funds, do the following: Click Transfer Funds link in the Accounts home page. The system displays the Transfer Funds screen. In the Transfer Funds screen, specify the From Account and Payee and To Account andPayee in the fields provided. Enter the description in the Memo text box and also specify the amount in the Transfer Amount text box. Once you have specified the above details, click Transfer Funds link. The system transfers the specified amount from the selected accounts. Click Cancel to cancel the Transfer Funds screen.   Manage Classes Using the Manage Classes feature, you can assign a class to any transaction. Classes are like having a second chart of accounts which you can apply to transactions whenever you want to group them into categories different from those provided by the Chart of Accounts. Accounts mostly organize transactions into financial categories-income, expenses, payables, receivables, etc.–but classes let you organize transactions into any categories you want and you have full control over what those categories are. Classes are most often used for getting management information from your accounting records. Because classes can represent specific areas or subunits of your business rather than just financial and tax categories. So they let you get separate reports about the profitability of those subunits of your business. You can differentiate the transactions based on class type.   Setting Up Classes To setup classes, do the following: Click on the Manage Classes link available in the Accounts home page. The system displays the Classes home page. The Classes screen displays the list of classes that are already created by the user. The details of the classes are displayed under the following columns: Name, Parent, Created By, Created Date, Modified By and Modified Date.   I. Creating New Class To create a new class, do the following: Click on Create Class link. The system displays the Class Type screen. In the Class Type screen, • Enter the class name in the Class Name text box. • Select the Subclass of check box option and specify the class for which you want to make this class as sub class of the selected class. • Enter the required description for the class in the Description field. • Once you have specified the details, click on ‘Save’ to save the new class. A new class is created and displayed in the Classes home page. • Click on Cancel to cancel the Class Type screen.   II. Editing Class To edit an existing class, do the following: • Select the required class you wish to edit and double click on it. The system displays the selected class in edit mode. • Make the required changes and click on Update to save the new changes. • Click on Cancel to cancel the Class Type screen.   III. Deleting Class To delete a class, do the following: • Select the required class you wish to delete and click on Delete link available in the Classes home page. The system prompts you for confirmation. • Click OK to confirm the deletion. Note: • A class that doesn’t have any child class will be deleted. • Classes that are associated with any transactions will not be deleted. View Accounts Detail The Accounts home page displays Chart of Accounts (list of active accounts). The details of the accounts are displayed under the following columns: Name: Displays the name of the account created. Account Number: Displays the Account Number given while creating the account. Parent: Displays the name of the parent account. Type: Displays the type of the account. The Type is a drop-down list containing the following options: Account Payable, Accounts Receivable, Asset, Bank, Credit Card, Equity, Expense, Income, Liability, Miscellaneous Expense and Miscellaneous Income. Location: Displays the name of the location along with location code where the account is being created. Department: Displays the name of the department along with department code under which the account is being created. Balance Total: Displays the total balance amount the account (and sub accounts) currently holds.   Assigning Accounts The accounts are assigned as below: Accounting Entities – they form the basis for inflow and outflow of money. Accounting Customers Tax Payable Account Accounts Receivable Account Income Account Accounting Vendors General Vendors Accounts Payable Account Expense Account Consulting Vendors Accounts Payable Account Expense Account Consultants-1099 Income Account Expense Account Account Payable Account Employees W2 Employees Income Account Expense Account C2C Employees Income Account Payroll Expense Account Payroll Liability Account Company Taxes (Taxes Setup) Tax Payable Account Bank With Opening Balance Equity Account   New (Customer/General Vendor/Consulting Vendor): Creating a new record will open the screen with the Accounts† set to Default Accounts. The drop list for each Account contains all the accounts (of that type) under the Default Location-Department and all the accounts (of that type) of all Departments under the selected Location. * The Location† is set to the default Location when the ‘create new record’ screen opens. What if: Q) The User Changes the Location to one other than the default (usually Loc Code: 100) and changes a default Account to one under the new Location. Then the User goes back and changes the Location†. A) All the Accounts† are set to defaults and an alert is given.   † These are found under Billing Information section for Customer/Consulting Vendor.   New (Consultants-1099/ W2 Employees/ C2C Employees): Creating a new record will open the screen with the Accounts (HR Data Compensation) set to Default Accounts. The drop list for each Account contains all the accounts (of that type) under the Default Location-Department and all the accounts (of that type) of the selected Department-Location. * The Location/Department is set to the default Location/Department when the ‘create new record’ screen opens. What if: Q) The User Changes the Location/Department to one other than the default (usually Loc. Code: 100 & Dep. Code: 100) and changes a default Account to one under the new Location/Department. Then the User goes back and changes the Location/Department. A) All the Accounts are set to defaults and an alert is given.   New (Company Taxes – Taxes Setup): Creating a new Tax record will open the screen with the Tax Payable Account set to Default Accounts. The drop list of the Account contains all the accounts (type: Liability) under the Default Location-Department and all the liability accounts of all Departments under the selected Location. * The Location is set to the default Location when the ‘create new record’ screen opens. What if: Q) The User Changes the Location to one other than the default (usually Loc Code: 100) and changes a default Account to one under the new Location. Then the User goes back and changes the Location. A) The Tax Payable Account is set to default and an alert is given.   New (Bank – With Opening Balance): Creating a new Bank record will open the screen with the Equity Account set to Default Accounts. The drop list the Account contains all the accounts (type: Equity) under the Default Location-Department and all the equity accounts of the selected Department-Location. * The Location/Department is set to the default Location/Department when the ‘create new record’ screen opens. What if: Q) The User Changes the Location/Department to one other than the default (usually Loc. Code: 100 & Dep. Code: 100) and changes the default Account to one under the new Location/Department. Then the User goes back and changes the Location/Department. A) The Equity Account is set to default and an alert is given.   Edit: Whenever the Location (or Department where applicable) are changed all the Accounts are set to defaults and an alert is given.   Posting Transactions to Accounts Transactions that affect/alter the Accounts Customers Deliver Invoices Receive Payments Pay Taxes Vendors Receive Bills Pay Bills Employees Run Net Pay Approve Pay stub Pay Liabilities Accounts Transfer Funds (alias: Use Register/Journal Entry) Banking Create Bank Account with Opening Balance Make Transactions Create New Account You can create a new account using the Create New link in the Accounts home page. To create a new account, do the following: Click on ‘Create New’ link. The system displays the New Account screen. In the above screen: Select the account type from the Type drop-down list. Enter the account number in the Account Number text box provided. (Once the record is saved the Account Number cannot be altered) Enter the account name in the Name text box provided. Select the location where the account is being created from the Location drop-down list. It contains the list of locations created by the user in HRM – Locations section. Initially, the default location is selected. The user can click on edit list link available beside the Locationdrop-down list to manage the locations. Select the department for the account from the Department drop-down list. It contains the list of departments created by the user HRM – Departments. Initially, the default department is selected. The user can click on edit list link available beside the Departmentdrop-down list to manage the departments. Select the sub account for the newly created account from the Sub Account of drop-down list. All accounts of the selected Type under all Locations and Departments are displayed in this list. Enter the required description and notes in the fields provided. Click on “Save” link to create a new account. An account is created and displayed in the Accounts home page. Click on “Close” link to close the New Account screen.   Note: Based on location selected in the Location drop-down list, the respective departments will be displayed in the Department drop-down list. If you change the location for a particular account, then the default departments will be displayed for that account. Default departments will be available for all locations. You cannot create bank accounts from Accounting – Accounts module. But you can view the bank accounts that are created in “Banking” section in Accounts section. Edit Account The edit option is a very important feature in Accounts, which allows you to edit existing accounts displayed in the Accounts home page. To edit an existing account, do the following: Select the required account you want to edit and click on Edit link available in the Accountshome page. The system refreshes and displays the account record in edit mode. Make the required changes and click on Update link to save the new changes. Note: Only Name, Sub Account of, Description and Notes fields are editable. You cannot change the Type of the account. Click on Close link to close the edit account screen.   What if: Q) Transactions have already been made involving the account being edited, would the changes be reflected in these transactions as well? A) No. All transactions affecting the account after the updation would have the updated information. The existing transactions would reflect the information that was present at the time the transaction was done.   Delete Accounts To delete an account, Select the required account and click on Delete link available in the Accounts home page. You are prompted with the following message: “By deleting Account, Accounts will be set to Default. Are you sure you want to Delete?” Click on OK to delete the account. All the deleted account(s) will be set to Defaults.   Note: If the accounts are associated with any transactions, then you cannot delete those accounts. When the user tries to delete any account that is associated with any transaction, then the system displays the following alert message. “You cannot delete this account as it is associated with other transactions.” Defining Accounts Register To view the list of transactions held under each account, Double click on any account in the Accounts home page to view the transaction history of the corresponding account register. Note:Each register shows all the transactions of all it’s sub-accounts as well. Accounts Payable Register The Accounts Payable Register screen displays the list of transactions held under Accounts Payableaccount. The details of the accounts payable account are displayed under the following columns as shown in the below table: Column Name Purpose Account Name Displays the name of the payable account. Date Displays the transaction date. Number Displays Check Number (Type: Pay Bill by check)  Displays Bill Number (Type: Bill) Type Displays the type of the payable account. “Pay Bill” or “Bill” Vendor Displays the name of the vendor for whom the amount is payable. Description Displays the description entered by the user while generating the Bill or Pay Bill. Due Date (Due)      Displays the due date for pending payments (if due date is past shows the date in red and the pending amount in braces).  For Bills which are completely paid it shows “PAID” For Bill Payments it shows the original bill number for which the payment was made. If multiple bills were paid in single transaction then it shows “-Split–” Billed Shows the amount that was billed Paid Shows the amount that was paid Balance Shows the accumulated balance in the account. Accounts Receivable Register The Accounts Receivable Register screen displays the list of transactions held under Accounts Receivableaccount. The details of the accounts receivable account are displayed under the following columns as shown in the below table: Column Name Purpose Account Name Displays the name of the receivable account. Date Displays the transaction date. Number    Displays Check Number (Type: Receive Payment for receive by check)  Displays Invoice Number (Type: Invoice) Type Displays the type of the payable account. “Invoice” or “Received Payment” Customer Displays the name of the Customer from whom the amount is receivable. Description    Displays the description entered by the user while creating the Invoice or Receive Payment. Due Date (Due)    Displays the due date for pending receipts (if due date is past shows the date in red and the pending amount in braces).  For Invoices for which amount is completely received it shows “PAID” For Received Payments it shows the original invoice number for which the receipt was done. If multiple invoices were received in single transaction then it  “-Split–” Amt Chrg Shows the amount that was invoiced Amt Paid Shows the amount that was received Balance Shows the accumulated balance in the account. Bank Register The Bank Register screen displays the list of transactions held under Bank Account. The details of bank are displayed under the following columns as shown in the below table: Column Name Purpose Account Name Displays the name of the bank account. Date Displays the date on which the transaction was made. Type Displays the type of bank account. (Received Payment, Pay Bill etc.) Payee Displays the name of the payee (for whom the amount is being paid/received). Description Displays the description entered by the user while making the transaction. Deposit Displays the amount deposited into the bank account. Payment Displays the amount paid to the payee. Balance Displays the balance amount for the bank account. Remaining Accounts Register You can refer the BANK Register topic information for the remaining account register for more information. The procedure remains the same as BANK register for all the other remaining accounts. Refer to the BANK Register topic for more details. <p><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: x-large;">Chart of Accounts</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Chart of Accounts</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>T</strong>he accounting process is centered on the Chart of Accounts. This is accessed from the ‘Accounts’ menu (which is the landing page of the Accounting module). The Chart of Accounts is a list of the Company’s business accounts and their balances. This list gives an overview of the financial standing of the Company (further categorized by Location and Department).</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">There are nine types of accounts that can be created.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1.      Asset                                (balance sheet account <span style="color: red;">†</span>)</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2.      Accounts Receivable          (balance sheet account <span style="color: red;">†</span>)</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3.      Accounts Payable              (balance sheet account <span style="color: red;">†</span>)</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">4.      Liability                              (balance sheet account<span style="color: red;">†</span>)</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">5.      Equity                                (balance sheet account <span style="color: red;">†</span>)</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">6.      Income                               (P&amp;L account <span style="color: red;">‡</span>)</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">7.      Miscellaneous Income         (P&amp;L account <span style="color: red;">‡</span>)</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">8.      Expense                             (P&amp;L account <span style="color: red;">‡</span>)</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">9.      Miscellaneous Expense       (P&amp;L account <span style="color: red;">‡</span>)</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><span style="color: red;">†</span><strong>Balance sheet accounts</strong>: These accounts appear on the balance sheet.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><span style="color: red;">‡</span><strong>Profit and Loss accounts</strong>: These accounts are used to track your income and expense (accrual basis).</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong><strong>B</strong></strong><strong>alance Sheet Accounts (Double Entry)</strong></span></p><table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium;" width="281"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Assets_and_Liabilities.gif" alt="" style="cursor: default; width: 310px; height: 99px;" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"></td></tr></tbody></table><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">ASSETS, LIABILITIES, AND EQUITY</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Assets</strong> are what you own. <strong>Liabilities</strong> are what you owe. <strong>Equity</strong> is what’s left over. It is your net worth.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Assets always equal your liabilities plus equity. If assets are less than liabilities then your equity is negative.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Assets are on the left of the balance sheet; liabilities and equity are on the right. This directly corresponds to debits and credits. Debits mean left; credits mean right.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Profit and Loss Accounts (Accrual Basis)</span></p><table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium;" width="150"><tbody><tr><td class="current" width="100%"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Income.gif" alt="" style="cursor: default; width: 300px; height: 32px;" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"></td></tr></tbody></table><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> </p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);">Journal Entries</p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);">Journal is a record that keeps accounting transactions in chronological order, i.e. as they occur.</p><table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium;" width="198"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Balance_Sheet.gif" alt="" style="cursor: default; width: 418px; height: 254px;" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"></td></tr></tbody></table><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> </p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Assets</strong>: As assets are placed on the debit side so initial entry of asset is obviously debited. Increase in asset will be debited and decrease in it will be credited.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Liabilities</strong>:  As liabilities are recorded on credit side so initial entries of liabilities are credited. Increase in liabilities will be credited and decrease in it will be debited.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Capital or Owner’s Equity</strong>:  As capital is a liability of the business so rule for liability will be applied for it.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Income</strong>:  Income and profits result into increase in capital which is liability, and increase in liability is credited thus increase in income will be credited and decrease in income will be debited.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Expenses or Losses</strong>:  Expenses result into decrease in capital consequently it is a decrease in liability, thus increase in expenses and losses will be debited and decreases in expenses will be credited.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Following are the rules of Debit and Credit</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Debit</strong>:  Increase in asset, Increase in expenses/losses, Decrease in liabilities, Decrease in capital/ownership, Decrease in revenue/income.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Credit</strong>:  Decrease in assets, Decrease in Expenses, Increase in liabilities, Increase in revenue/income, Increase in capital/ownership</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Retained Earnings</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">What Does Retained Earnings Mean?</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The percentage of net earnings not paid out as dividends, but retained by the company to be reinvested in its core business or to pay debt. It is recorded under shareholders’ equity on the balance sheet.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The formula calculates retained earnings by adding net income to (or subtracting any net losses from) beginning retained earnings and subtracting any dividends paid to shareholders:</span></p><table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" width="190"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Retained_Earnings.gif" alt="" style="cursor: default; width: 411px; height: 30px;" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"></span></td></tr></tbody></table><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Also known as “retention ratio” or “retained surplus”.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Investopedia explains Retained Earnings</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In most cases; companies retain their earnings in order to invest them into areas where the company can create growth opportunities, such as buying new machinery or spending the money on more research and development.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Should a net loss be greater than beginning retained earnings, retained earnings can become negative, creating a deficit.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The retained earnings general ledger account is adjusted every time a journal entry is made to an income or expense account.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Setting Up Chart of Accounts</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Default Accounts</strong>* are created when the Company is setup.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">*The Default Accounts are created under the Default Location (a default ID of 100 is assigned and can be changed as suitable, the name is entered while setting up the company) and Default Department (a default ID of 100 is assigned and can be changed as suitable, the name is Administrative). The Account Numbers cannot be changed.</span></p><table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium;" width="924"><tbody> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Name</td> <td width="14.286%">Type</td> <td width="11.536%">Base Type</td> <td width="10.536%">Loc Code</td> <td width="10.536%">Dept.Code</td> <td width="14.286%">Account Number</td> <td width="10.536%">Series</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Accounts Receivable</td> <td width="14.286%">Accounts Receivable</td> <td width="11.536%">Assets</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001001001">100-100-1001</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">1000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Other Current Asset</td> <td width="14.286%">Asset</td> <td width="11.536%">Asset</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001001002">100-100-1002</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">1000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Undeposited Funds</td> <td width="14.286%">Asset</td> <td width="11.536%">Asset</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001001003">100-100-1003</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">1000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Other Current Liability</td> <td width="14.286%">Liability</td> <td width="11.536%">Liability <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> </p> </td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001002002">100-100-2002</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">2000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Taxes Payable</td> <td width="14.286%">Liability</td> <td width="11.536%">Liability</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001002003">100-100-2003</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">2000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Payroll Liabilities</td> <td width="14.286%">Liability</td> <td width="11.536%">Liability</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001002004">100-100-2004</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">2000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Accounts Payable</td> <td width="14.286%">Accounts Payable</td> <td width="11.536%">Liability</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001002001">100-100-2001</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">2000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Opening Balance Equity</td> <td width="14.286%">Equity</td> <td width="11.536%">Equity</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001003001">100-100-3001</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">3000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Service/Customer Income</td> <td width="14.286%">Income</td> <td width="11.536%">Income</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001004001">100-100-4001</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">4000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Uncategorized Income</td> <td width="14.286%">Miscellaneous Income</td> <td width="11.536%">Income</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001007001">100-100-7001</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">7000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Payroll Expenses</td> <td width="14.286%">Expense</td> <td width="11.536%">Expense</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001006002">100-100-6002</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">6000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Consulting/Vendor Expenses</td> <td width="14.286%">Expense</td> <td width="11.536%">Expense</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001006001">100-100-6001</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">6000</td> </tr> <tr> <td width="14.286%">Uncategorized Expenses</td> <td width="14.286%">Miscellaneous Expense</td> <td width="11.536%">Expense</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="10.536%">100</td> <td width="14.286%"><span><span class="shoretel_phone_link" title="ShoreTel Web Dialer: 11001008001">100-100-8001</span></span></td> <td width="10.536%">8000</td> </tr> </tbody></table><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>: The Bank Accounts and Credit Card Accounts can be created from the Banking section.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Transfer Funds</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Transfer Funds link allows you to transfer the funds from one account to another account.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To transfers the funds, do the following:</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click Transfer Funds link in the Accounts home page. The system displays the Transfer Funds screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the <strong>Transfer Funds</strong> screen, specify the <strong>From Account</strong> and <strong>Payee</strong> and <strong>To Account</strong> and<strong>Payee</strong> in the fields provided.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the description in the <strong>Memo</strong> text box and also specify the amount in the <strong>Transfer Amount</strong> text box.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Once you have specified the above details, click <strong>Transfer Funds</strong> link. The system transfers the specified amount from the selected accounts.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>Cancel</strong> to cancel the Transfer Funds screen.</span></li> </ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Manage Classes</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Using the <strong>Manage Classes</strong> feature, you can assign a class to any transaction.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Classes are like having a second chart of accounts which you can apply to transactions whenever you want to group them into categories different from those provided by the Chart of Accounts.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Accounts mostly organize transactions into financial categories-income, expenses, payables, receivables, etc.–but classes let you organize transactions into any categories you want and you have full control over what those categories are.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Classes are most often used for getting management information from your accounting records. Because classes can represent specific areas or subunits of your business rather than just financial and tax categories. So they let you get separate reports about the profitability of those subunits of your business.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You can differentiate the transactions based on class type.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Setting Up Classes</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To setup classes, do the following:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>Manage Classes</strong> link available in the Accounts home page. The system displays the Classes home page.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Classes screen displays the list of classes that are already created by the user. The details of the classes are displayed under the following columns: Name, Parent, Created By, Created Date, Modified By and Modified Date.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">I. Creating New Class</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To create a new class, do the following:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on Create Class link. The system displays the Class Type screen.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the Class Type screen,</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Enter the class name in the Class Name text box.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Select the Subclass of check box option and specify the class for which you want to make this class as sub class of the selected class.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Enter the required description for the class in the Description field.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Once you have specified the details, click on ‘Save’ to save the new class. A new class is created and displayed in the Classes home page.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Click on Cancel to cancel the Class Type screen.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">II. Editing Class</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To edit an existing class, do the following:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Select the required class you wish to edit and double click on it. The system displays the selected class in edit mode.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Make the required changes and click on Update to save the new changes.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Click on Cancel to cancel the Class Type screen.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">III. Deleting Class</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To delete a class, do the following:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Select the required class you wish to delete and click on Delete link available in the Classes home page. The system prompts you for confirmation.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Click OK to confirm the deletion.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• A class that doesn’t have any child class will be deleted.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">• Classes that are associated with any transactions will not be deleted.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">View Accounts Detail</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Accounts home page displays Chart of Accounts (list of active accounts).</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The details of the accounts are displayed under the following columns:</span></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Name: Displays the name of the account created.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Account Number: Displays the Account Number given while creating the account.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Parent: Displays the name of the parent account.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Type: Displays the type of the account. The Type is a drop-down list containing the following options: Account Payable, Accounts Receivable, Asset, Bank, Credit Card, Equity, Expense, Income, Liability, Miscellaneous Expense and Miscellaneous Income.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Location: </strong>Displays the name of the location along with location code where the account is being created.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Department: Displays the name of the department along with department code under which the account is being created.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Balance Total: Displays the total balance amount the account (and sub accounts) currently holds.</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Assigning Accounts</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The accounts are assigned as below:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Accounting Entities – they form the basis for inflow and outflow of money.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Accounting Customers</b></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Tax Payable Account</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Accounts Receivable Account</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Income Account</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Accounting Vendors</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">General Vendors</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="disc"><li> <br><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Accounts Payable Account</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Expense Account</span></li> </ul> </li></ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Consulting Vendors</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="disc"><li> <br><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Accounts Payable Account</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Expense Account</span></li> </ul> </li></ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Consultants-1099</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="disc"><li> <br><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Income Account</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Expense Account</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Account Payable Account</span></li> </ul> </li></ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Employees</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">W2 Employees</span></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Income Account</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Expense Account</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">C2C Employees</span></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Income Account</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Payroll Expense Account</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Payroll Liability Account</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Company Taxes (Taxes Setup)</span></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Tax Payable Account</span></li></ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Bank With Opening Balance</span></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Equity Account</span></li></ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">New (Customer/General Vendor/Consulting Vendor):</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Creating a new record will open the screen with the Accounts† set to Default Accounts.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The drop list for each Account contains all the accounts (of that type) under the Default Location-Department and all the accounts (of that type) of all Departments under the selected Location.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">* The Location† is set to the default Location when the ‘create new record’ screen opens.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">What if:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Q) The User Changes the Location to one other than the default (usually Loc Code: 100) and changes a default Account to one under the new Location. Then the User goes back and changes the Location†.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">A) All the Accounts† are set to defaults and an alert is given.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">† These are found under Billing Information section for Customer/Consulting Vendor.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">New (Consultants-1099/ W2 Employees/ C2C Employees):</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Creating a new record will open the screen with the Accounts (HR Data Compensation) set to Default Accounts.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The drop list for each Account contains all the accounts (of that type) under the Default Location-Department and all the accounts (of that type) of the selected Department-Location.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">* The Location/Department is set to the default Location/Department when the ‘create new record’ screen opens.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">What if:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Q) The User Changes the Location/Department to one other than the default (usually Loc. Code: 100 &amp; Dep. Code: 100) and changes a default Account to one under the new Location/Department. Then the User goes back and changes the Location/Department.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">A) All the Accounts are set to defaults and an alert is given.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">New (Company Taxes – Taxes Setup):</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Creating a new Tax record will open the screen with the Tax Payable Account set to Default Accounts.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The drop list of the Account contains all the accounts (type: Liability) under the Default Location-Department and all the liability accounts of all Departments under the selected Location.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">* The Location is set to the default Location when the ‘create new record’ screen opens.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">What if:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Q) The User Changes the Location to one other than the default (usually Loc Code: 100) and changes a default Account to one under the new Location. Then the User goes back and changes the Location.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">A) The Tax Payable Account is set to default and an alert is given.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">New (Bank – With Opening Balance):</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Creating a new Bank record will open the screen with the Equity Account set to Default Accounts.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The drop list the Account contains all the accounts (type: Equity) under the Default Location-Department and all the equity accounts of the selected Department-Location.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">* The Location/Department is set to the default Location/Department when the ‘create new record’ screen opens.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">What if:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Q) The User Changes the Location/Department to one other than the default (usually Loc. Code: 100 &amp; Dep. Code: 100) and changes the default Account to one under the new Location/Department. Then the User goes back and changes the Location/Department.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">A) The Equity Account is set to default and an alert is given.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Edit</strong>:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Whenever the Location (or Department where applicable) are changed all the Accounts are set to defaults and an alert is given.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Posting Transactions to Accounts</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Transactions that affect/alter the Accounts</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Customers</b></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Deliver Invoices</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Receive Payments</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Pay Taxes</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Vendors</b></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Receive Bills</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Pay Bills</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Employees</b></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Run Net Pay</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Approve Pay stub</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Pay Liabilities</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Accounts</b></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Transfer Funds (alias: Use Register/Journal Entry)</span></li></ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Banking</b></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Create Bank Account with Opening Balance</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Make Transactions</span></li> </ul><div><font color="#4a4a4a" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div><div><font><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">Create New Account</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You can create a new account using the <strong>Create New</strong> link in the <strong>Accounts</strong> home page.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To create a new account, do the following:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>‘Create New’</strong> link. The system displays the <strong>New Account</strong> screen.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503436/original/YQqeqOPMbqMsOfY7tZg-cf8guOsIaK1ORQ?1501079635" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503436/original/YQqeqOPMbqMsOfY7tZg-cf8guOsIaK1ORQ?1501079635" data-fileid="4041503436" data-uniquekey="1501079588606"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the account type from the <strong>Type</strong> drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the account number in the <strong>Account Number</strong> text box provided. (Once the record is saved the Account Number cannot be altered)</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the account name in the <strong>Name</strong> text box provided.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the location where the account is being created from the <strong>Location</strong> drop-down list. It contains the list of locations created by the user in <strong>HRM – Locations</strong> section. Initially, the default location is selected. The user can click on <strong>edit list</strong> link available beside the <strong>Location</strong>drop-down list to manage the locations.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the department for the account from the <strong>Department</strong> drop-down list. It contains the list of departments created by the user <strong>HRM – Departments</strong>. Initially, the default department is selected. The user can click on <strong>edit list</strong> link available beside the <strong>Department</strong>drop-down list to manage the departments.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the sub account for the newly created account from the <strong>Sub Account of</strong> drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">All accounts of the selected <strong>Type</strong> under all <strong>Locations</strong> and <strong>Departments</strong> are displayed in this list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the required description and notes in the fields provided.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>“Save”</strong> link to create a new account. An account is created and displayed in the Accounts home page.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>“Close”</strong> link to close the New Account screen.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>:</span></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Based on location selected in the <strong>Location</strong> drop-down list, the respective departments will be displayed in the <strong>Department</strong> drop-down list. If you change the location for a particular account, then the default departments will be displayed for that account.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Default departments will be available for all locations.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You cannot create bank accounts from <strong>Accounting – Accounts</strong> module. But you can view the bank accounts that are created in <strong>“Banking”</strong> section in Accounts section.</span></li> </ul> <div><font style="font-size: medium;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">Edit Accoun</b><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">t</span></font></div> </div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The edit option is a very important feature in Accounts, which allows you to edit existing accounts displayed in the Accounts home page.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To edit an existing account, do the following:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required account you want to edit and click on <strong>Edit</strong> link available in the <strong>Accounts</strong>home page. The system refreshes and displays the account record in edit mode.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Make the required changes and click on <strong>Update</strong> link to save the new changes.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>: Only <strong>Name, Sub Account of, Description </strong>and<strong> Notes</strong> fields are editable. You cannot change the <strong>Type</strong> of the account.</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>Close</strong> link to close the edit account screen.</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">What if:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Q</strong>) Transactions have already been made involving the account being edited, would the changes be reflected in these transactions as well?</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>A</strong>) <strong>No</strong>. All transactions affecting the account after the updation would have the updated information. The existing transactions would reflect the information that was present at the time the transaction was done.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Delete Accounts</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To delete an account,</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required account and click on <strong>Delete</strong> link available in the <strong>Accounts</strong> home page. You are prompted with the following message:</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">“By deleting Account, Accounts will be set to Default. Are you sure you want to Delete?”</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>OK</strong> to delete the account. All the deleted account(s) will be set to <strong>Defaults</strong>.</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">If the accounts are associated with any transactions, then you cannot delete those accounts.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">When the user tries to delete any account that is associated with any transaction, then the system displays the following alert message.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">“You cannot delete this account as it is associated with other transactions.”</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">Defining Accounts Register</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To view the list of transactions held under each account,</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Double click on any account in the <strong>Accounts</strong> home page to view the transaction history of the corresponding account register.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>:Each register shows all the transactions of all it’s sub-accounts as well.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">Accounts Payable Register</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Accounts Payable Register screen displays the list of transactions held under <strong>Accounts Payable</strong>account.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The details of the accounts payable account are displayed under the following columns as shown in the below table:</span></p> <table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" width="626"><tbody> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Column Name</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Purpose</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Account Name</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the name of the payable account.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Date</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the transaction date.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Number</span></td> <td width="50%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Displays Check Number (Type: Pay Bill by check) </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays Bill Number (Type: Bill)</span></p> </td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Type</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the type of the payable account. “Pay Bill” or “Bill”</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Vendor</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the name of the vendor for whom the amount is payable.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Description</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the description entered by the user while generating the Bill or Pay Bill.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Due Date (Due) </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> </td> <td width="50%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the due date for pending payments (if due date is past shows the date in red and the pending amount in braces). </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">For Bills which are completely paid it shows “PAID”</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">For Bill Payments it shows the original bill number for which the payment was made. If multiple bills were paid in single transaction then it shows “-Split–”</span></p> </td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Billed</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Shows the amount that was billed</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Paid</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Shows the amount that was paid</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td class="current" width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Balance</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Shows the accumulated balance in the account.</span></td> </tr> </tbody></table> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">Accounts Receivable Register</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Accounts Receivable Register screen displays the list of transactions held under <strong>Accounts Receivable</strong>account.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The details of the accounts receivable account are displayed under the following columns as shown in the below table:</span></p> <table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" width="625"><tbody> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Column Name</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Purpose</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Account Name</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the name of the receivable account.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Date</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the transaction date.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Number </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> </td> <td width="50%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Displays Check Number (Type: Receive Payment for receive by check) </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays Invoice Number (Type: Invoice)</span></p> </td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Type</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the type of the payable account. “Invoice” or “Received Payment”</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Customer</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the name of the Customer from whom the amount is receivable.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Description </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> </td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the description entered by the user while creating the Invoice or Receive Payment.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Due Date (Due) </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> </td> <td width="50%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the due date for pending receipts (if due date is past shows the date in red and the pending amount in braces). </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">For Invoices for which amount is completely received it shows “PAID”</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">For Received Payments it shows the original invoice number for which the receipt was done. If multiple invoices were received in single transaction then it  “-Split–”</span></p> </td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Amt Chrg</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Shows the amount that was invoiced</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Amt Paid</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Shows the amount that was received</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Balance</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Shows the accumulated balance in the account.</span></td> </tr> </tbody></table> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">Bank Register</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Bank Register screen displays the list of transactions held under Bank Account.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The details of bank are displayed under the following columns as shown in the below table:</span></p> <table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" width="626"><tbody> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Column Name</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Purpose</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Account Name</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the name of the bank account.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Date</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the date on which the transaction was made.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Type</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the type of bank account. (Received Payment, Pay Bill etc.)</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Payee</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the name of the payee (for whom the amount is being paid/received).</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Description</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the description entered by the user while making the transaction.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Deposit</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the amount deposited into the bank account.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Payment</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the amount paid to the payee.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="27.75%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Balance</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the balance amount for the bank account.</span></td> </tr> </tbody></table> </div><div><font color="#4a4a4a" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div><p><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">Remaining Accounts Register</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You can refer the BANK Register topic information for the remaining account register for more information. The procedure remains the same as BANK register for all the other remaining accounts.</span></p><table cellspacing="0"><tbody><tr> <td width="68px"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image068.jpg" alt="" style="width: 39px; height: 38px;" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"></span></td> <td width="15px"><br></td> <td width="720px"><span style="font-size: medium;">Refer to the<span> </span><strong><a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/BANK_Register.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">BANK Register<span> </span></a></strong>topic for more details.</span></td> </tr></tbody></table><p><br></p> 266150 814 4000010486 2017-07-26T10:34:03-04:00 4004241107 6 2 1 0 Accounting - Accounts 2015-08-21T04:41:08-04:00 12054499 1 2014-04-29T10:02:08-04:00 1 0 DETAILS OF RECEIVED PAYMENTS In order to have a clear understanding about the payments received from the customer, you have the facility to view the details of the received payments. Double click on the desired record from Receive Payments Register screen, to view the complete details of the payments received from the customer. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the received payments details from the customer as shown below. The details displayed in the screen are non-editable, and it is automatically generated by the application. The refreshed screen displays the following: 1. The Date field in the top right corner of the screen displays the date, on which the payment was received from the customer. 2. The screen will have the following fields: Customer, Payment Method, Deposited to, Memo, Check Number, and Amount Paid fields respectively. 3. Each field will display the required information regarding the payments. 4. The receive payments screen will have the following columns: Customer, Invoice Date, Due Date, ($) Original Amount, ($) Opening Balance, and ($) Payment. 5. Under each column, corresponding details regarding the payments are displayed. 6. The ($) Totals field will display the total balance amount, which is still pending from the particular customer. 7. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel, and return to previous page. RECEIVE PAYMENTS REGISTER AkkenCloud allows this useful facility to maintain the details of the received payments in an orderly format. Receive Payments Register under Customers feature is one region, where you can view all the details of the payments that has been received from the customers so far, for the organization. The Receive Payment Register link will display the list of payments that are received from all the Customers. To view the records of the received payments, click on the ‘Receive Payments Register’ link from the Receive Payments screen. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the list of received payments records, as shown below. In the above screen: The Select Customer drop-down list will display only the Customers from whom the receipts have been made. The “From” and “To” dates available at the top right corner of the screen will determine the date range of the receipts made. The user can double-click on any customer record to view the payment details from that customer for the selected date range. Double-click on any customer record. The system displays the following screen: The above screen will display the payment receipt particulars of the selected customer under the following columns: Invoice Number, Customer,  Invoice Date, Due Date, ($) Original Amount, ($) Payment, Received By and Invoice Status (Delivered/Deleted). The Invoice Status column displays the Deleted status if the status of the invoice is deleted. However, the user has an option to adjust the amount received from the customer towards the deleted invoice with the future invoice generation process. The Received By column displays the name of the user who is entering the transactions. Receive Payment Register screen will display the list of transactions by the date last received. When a customer is selected from the drop down, the transactions will be listed by date for that customer. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel and return to previous page. RECEIPTS FROM CUSTOMERS In order to record the receipts from the customers, you are required to fill in the details regarding the payments received from the customer. To make the receipts, you can select the name of the required customer in the Select a Customer field from Receive Payments screen. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the name of the selected customer along with the record details of the pending amounts. The refreshed screen displays the following details: 1. By default the Date field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the current date. Alternatively, the desired date can be selected by clicking the calendar icon. 2. By default the selected customer’s name is displayed in the Select a Customer drop down list. 3. Select the bank name where the received payment amount will be deposited to, from the Deposit to drop down list. 4. In the Memo field, mention a brief description about the current payment. 5. From Payment Method drop down list, you can select the mode of payment, which can either be through either check or cash. 6. Enter the cheque number of the cheque provided by the customer in the Check Number text box. 7. The screen displays the following columns: Invoice No, Customer, Invoice Date, Due Date, ($) Original Amount, ($) Amount Due, and ($) Payment. 8. Under each column, the corresponding details are displayed. 9. Click on the desired number link under the Invoice column to view the details of the delivered invoice. Result: The Receive Payments Screen refreshes by displaying the details of the selected invoice. 10. The ($) Balance field displays the total amount pending from the customer. 11. To make a receipt for the payment received from the customer, select the record in the given check box, and enter the amount under the ($)Payment column corresponding to the selected record, and then Click on the ‘Receive Pay’ link. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the Receive Payments screen. 12. The received payment from the customer is now registered under ‘ Receive Payments Register’ link. RECEIVING PAYMENTS Receive Payments under Customers, allows you to receive the payments that are due from the customers. With the help of Receive Payments, you can make an entry of the received payments, and can maintain a register for all customers individually. In order to view Receive Payments from Accounting home page, click on the Customers link on the left pane of the home page, and select Receive Payments link. Result: The Customers screen refreshes by displaying Receive Payments Screen as shown below: In the above screen, the user can do the following things: Select a Customer from the Select a Customer drop-down list. Selecting the Customer from this drop-down list will display the list of customers that are having due amount as shown in the below screen: The above screen will display the due amount that is to be received from the selected customer under the following columns: Invoice No., Customer, Invoice Date, Due Date, ($) Original Amount andAmount Due. The above screen also provides an option to the user to select multiple invoices, receive payments by way of cash or check and deposit the amount to the bank as selected in the Deposit To drop-down list, by entering the amount into the fields provided next to the invoice below the ($) Payment column. Note: The amount entered below the payment column must be greater than zero (0). The user can do the payment for the customer using the Payment Method field. User has an option to select Cash or Check. If the user selects Cash as payment method, then the user cannot enter the Check number in theCheck Number text box provided. The Check Number text box will be disabled when the user selects the payment option as Cash in the Payment Method field. If the user selects Check as payment method, then the Check Number text box will be displayed in enabled mode that allows the user to enter the check number. When the user clicks on Invoice number link available in the Invoice No. column, then the system displays the appropriate invoice details. The Deposit To drop-down list will display the list of all banks. Clicking on Receive Pay will receive the payment. Click on the ‘Receive Payments Register’ to know the details of the received payments from the customers.  INVOICE HISTORY Invoices History is an important feature under Customers. AkkenCloud provides this concept, which helps you to keep track of all the invoices that are delivered to the customers. You can find the list of records, which gives the details of the delivered invoices accordingly. To view the invoices history from Accounting home page, click on the Customers link on the left pane of the home page, and select Invoices History link. Result: The Customers screen refreshes by displaying Invoices History screen. The refreshed screen, displays the following details: The From date field and To date field automatically displays the period, from when the list of invoices have been delivered. Alternatively, you can use the calendar icon to specify the dates. You can also edit the From date and To date fields, and click on the View link, available beside the calendar icon. The screen refreshes by displaying the list of invoices to be delivered based on the dates specified. The Select Customer field will have the drop down list consisting of the list of customers names, for whom the invoices are delivered. By default all the invoices to be delivered will be shown. Click on the Print link to print the invoices. The system refreshes by displaying the invoice in PDF format. To remove the invoices, select the required invoice records and click ‘Remove Invoices’  link. Confirm the removal of the invoices in the prompt. The screen refreshes by removing the selected invoice to Create Invoice screen. Double click on the desired record to view the complete details of the invoice to be delivered. PRINTING INVOICES AkkenCloud allows you to take a hard copy (printed output) of the delivered invoices of the customers. Printing Single Invoice Select the required invoice record and click Print link available in the Deliver Invoices/Invoice History home page. The system refreshes by displaying the invoice in PDF format, as shown below: In the PDF file, click Print icon in the toolbar or select Print option from File menu.   Printing Multiple Invoices You can print multiple invoices using Print link available in theDeliver Invoicesand Invoice History screens. Select the required invoice records and click Print link. The system displays the following alert message: In the above screen, Click Yes to print multiple invoices. Click No to cancel the print process. Follow the process described above to take the printed version of the selected invoices. AkkenCloud allows you to preview the details of the generated invoice before delivering the invoice. In order to preview the complete details of the generated invoice, click on the‘Preview’ link in the Deliver Invoices display screen, which has to be delivered. The Invoice screen refreshes by displaying the generated invoice details. The refreshed screen displays the following details: The deliver invoice screen has four links in the provided strip bar: Export, Print,Update,and Close links respectively. The screen displays the final details of the generated invoice that has to be delivered to the customer. The details displayed in the screen are the same as the details discussed in the ‘View Invoice Details’ topic. Click on theExport link to export the delivered invoice details. You can export the invoices either in CSV or PDF format. Click on Print link to print the invoice(s). To edit the Time Sheet and Expenses details, click on the date links corresponding to each Time Sheet and Expenses row displayed under Service Date column.  Click on the ‘Update’ link to modify the changed details in the invoice before delivering. The invoice screen refreshes by displaying the updated invoice in the Deliver Invoice Screen. Click on the ‘Close’ link to cancel, and returns to Deliver Invoices Screen. VIEW GENERATED INVOICE DETAILS AkkenCloud allows you to view the details of the generated invoices. In order to view the complete details of the generated invoices, double click on the desired record, which has to be delivered. The Deliver Invoices screen refreshes by displaying the generated invoice details. The refreshed screen displays the following details: 1. The deliver invoice screen has six links in the provided strip bar: Export, Print, Recalculate, Update, Preview, and Cancel. 2. The details displayed in the screen are the same as the details discussed in the ‘View Invoice Details’ topic.  3. After making the changes in the desired fields, click on the ‘Recalculate’ link. 4. Click on the ‘Preview’ link, in order to preview the invoice before delivering the invoice.  5. Click on the ‘Cancel’ link to cancel, and return to the Deliver Invoices Screen. DELIVER INVOICE DETAILS AkkenCloud allows you to deliver the generated invoices to the customer with Deliver Invoice feature. To deliver an invoice from Accounting home page, click on the Customers link on the left pane of the home page, and select the Deliver Invoices link. Result: The Customers screen refreshes by displaying Deliver Invoices screen. The refreshed screen, displays the following details: The From date field and To date field automatically displays the period, from when the list of invoices are due to be delivered. Alternatively, you can use the calendar icon to specify the dates You can even edit the From date and To date fields, and click on the View link, available beside the calendar icon. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the list of invoices to be delivered based on the dates specified. The Select Customer field will have the drop down list consisting of the customers names, for whom the invoices are due for delivery. By default the screen shows the list of invoices to be delivered of all the customers. The Deliver Invoices screen will have the following columns respectively: Invoice. No., Customer, Invoice Date, Due Date,($) Balance and Delivery Method. Under each column, corresponding details of the customers’ invoice are displayed. Click on the Print link to print the invoices. The system refreshes by displaying the invoice in PDF format. You can also have an option to save the invoice in PDF format by clicking on the Save link. Double click on the desired record to view the complete details of the invoice to be delivered.  To remove the invoices, select the required invoice records and click ‘Remove Invoices’  link. Confirm the removal of the invoices in the prompt. The system refreshes by removing the selected invoices from the Deliver Invoices screen. Note: You can remove multiple invoices at a time. To deliver an invoice directly, you need to select the particular record by checking the check box, and click on the ‘Deliver Invoice’ link. The screen refreshes after delivering the selected invoice. PREVIEW INVOICE DETAILS AkkenCloud allows you to preview the details of the invoice before generating the invoice. To preview the details of the invoice, do the following: Click on Preview link available in the Invoice Details screen. The system refreshes and displays the preview of the invoice screen. Click on Generate Invoice link to generate the invoice. The system refreshes by generating the invoice and displays the Create Invoices screen. Click on Close link to close the Invoice Preview screen. <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: x-large;"><strong>DETAILS OF RECEIVED PAYMENTS</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In order to have a clear understanding about the payments received from the customer, you have the facility to view the details of the received payments. Double click on the desired record from Receive Payments Register screen, to view the complete details of the payments received from the customer. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the received payments details from the customer as shown below.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The details displayed in the screen are non-editable, and it is automatically generated by the application.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503795/original/3DEZMh0a7elDy-L9NNTPbrTc91qZWDWF4A?1501080137" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503795/original/3DEZMh0a7elDy-L9NNTPbrTc91qZWDWF4A?1501080137" data-fileid="4041503795" data-uniquekey="1501079734128"></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The refreshed screen displays the following:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1. The Date field in the top right corner of the screen displays the date, on which the payment was received from the customer.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2. The screen will have the following fields: Customer, Payment Method, Deposited to, Memo, Check Number, and Amount Paid fields respectively.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3. Each field will display the required information regarding the payments.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">4. The receive payments screen will have the following columns: Customer, Invoice Date, Due Date, ($) Original Amount, ($) Opening Balance, and ($) Payment.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">5. Under each column, corresponding details regarding the payments are displayed.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">6. The ($) Totals field will display the total balance amount, which is still pending from the particular customer.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">7. Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’</strong> link to cancel, and return to previous page.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">RECEIVE PAYMENTS REGISTER</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>AkkenCloud </strong>allows this useful facility to maintain the details of the received payments in an orderly format. Receive Payments Register under Customers feature is one region, where you can view all the details of the payments that has been received from the customers so far, for the organization.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The <strong>Receive Payment Register</strong> link will display the list of payments that are received from all the Customers.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To view the records of the received payments, click on the <strong>‘Receive Payments Register’</strong> link from the Receive Payments screen. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the list of received payments records, as shown below.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503821/original/kwjFsPheMnB1dcrUDN0ZnZ5oYm44gIQIpg?1501080188" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503821/original/kwjFsPheMnB1dcrUDN0ZnZ5oYm44gIQIpg?1501080188" data-fileid="4041503821" data-uniquekey="1501079734128"></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen:</span></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The <strong>Select Customer</strong> drop-down list will display only the Customers from whom the receipts have been made.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The <strong>“From”</strong> and <strong>“To”</strong> dates available at the top right corner of the screen will determine the date range of the receipts made.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The user can double-click on any customer record to view the payment details from that customer for the selected date range.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Double-click on any customer record. The system displays the following screen:</span></li> </ul><div> <font color="#4a4a4a" size="3"><span></span></font><font color="#4a4a4a" size="3"><span><p><br></p></span></font> </div><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503795/original/3DEZMh0a7elDy-L9NNTPbrTc91qZWDWF4A?1501080137" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503795/original/3DEZMh0a7elDy-L9NNTPbrTc91qZWDWF4A?1501080137" data-fileid="4041503795" data-uniquekey="1501079734128"></p><div><font color="#4a4a4a" size="3"><span><p><br></p></span></font></div><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The above screen will display the payment receipt particulars of the selected customer under the following columns: <strong>Invoice Number, Customer,  Invoice Date, Due Date, ($) Original Amount, ($) Payment, Received By </strong>and<strong> Invoice Status (Delivered/Deleted).</strong></span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The <strong>Invoice Status</strong> column displays the <strong>Deleted</strong> status if the status of the invoice is deleted. However, the user has an option to adjust the amount received from the customer towards the deleted invoice with the future invoice generation process.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The <strong>Received By</strong> column displays the name of the user who is entering the transactions.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Receive Payment Register screen will display the list of transactions by the date last received. When a customer is selected from the drop down, the transactions will be listed by date for that customer.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’</strong> link to cancel and return to previous page.</span></li> </ul><div><font color="#4a4a4a" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div><div><font><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">RECEIPTS FROM CUSTOMERS</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In order to record the receipts from the customers, you are required to fill in the details regarding the payments received from the customer. To make the receipts, you can select the name of the required customer in the <em>Select a Customer</em> field from Receive Payments screen. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the name of the selected customer along with the record details of the pending amounts.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503867/original/4NvgHb0d8KOjbg--7mNn965PjY2RfQr2ng?1501080245" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503867/original/4NvgHb0d8KOjbg--7mNn965PjY2RfQr2ng?1501080245" data-fileid="4041503867" data-uniquekey="1501079734128"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The refreshed screen displays the following details:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1. By default the Date field in the top right corner of the screen, displays the current date. Alternatively, the desired date can be selected by clicking the calendar icon<img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image009.jpg" alt="" class="fr-dii fr-draggable" style="width: 16px; height: 16px;">.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2. By default the selected customer’s name is displayed in the Select a Customer drop down list.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3. Select the bank name where the received payment amount will be deposited to, from the Deposit to drop down list.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">4. In the Memo field, mention a brief description about the current payment.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">5. From Payment Method drop down list, you can select the mode of payment, which can either be through either check or cash.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">6. Enter the cheque number of the cheque provided by the customer in the Check Number text box.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">7. The screen displays the following columns: Invoice No, Customer, Invoice Date, Due Date, ($) Original Amount, ($) Amount Due, and ($) Payment.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">8. Under each column, the corresponding details are displayed.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">9. Click on the desired number link under the Invoice column to view the details of the delivered invoice. Result: The Receive Payments Screen refreshes by displaying the details of the selected invoice.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">10. The ($) Balance field displays the total amount pending from the customer.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">11. To make a receipt for the payment received from the customer, select the record in the given check box, and enter the amount under the ($)Payment column corresponding to the selected record, and then Click on the <strong>‘Receive Pay’</strong> link. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the Receive Payments screen.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">12. The received payment from the customer is now registered under <strong>‘ Receive Payments Register’</strong> link.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>RECEIVING PAYMENTS</strong></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Receive Payments under Customers, allows you to receive the payments that are due from the customers. With the help of Receive Payments, you can make an entry of the received payments, and can maintain a register for all customers individually.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In order to view Receive Payments from Accounting home page, click on the Customers link on the left pane of the home page, and select <strong>Receive Payments</strong> link. Result: The Customers screen refreshes by displaying Receive Payments Screen as shown below:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503929/original/UatfPI9qbcf0-PIamBugioMYqTh3HXOOGw?1501080314" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503929/original/UatfPI9qbcf0-PIamBugioMYqTh3HXOOGw?1501080314" data-fileid="4041503929" data-uniquekey="1501079734128"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen, the user can do the following things:</span></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select a Customer from the <strong>Select a Customer</strong> drop-down list. Selecting the Customer from this drop-down list will display the list of customers that are having due amount as shown in the below screen:</span></li></ul> <div><br></div> <div><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503986/original/kTlOm5kMAP0AzZ4roy2Tuvnrq8ziNOVRoQ?1501080374" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041503986/original/kTlOm5kMAP0AzZ4roy2Tuvnrq8ziNOVRoQ?1501080374" data-fileid="4041503986" data-uniquekey="1501079734128"></p></div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The above screen will display the due amount that is to be received from the selected customer under the following columns: <strong>Invoice No., Customer, Invoice Date, Due Date, ($) Original Amount </strong>and<strong>Amount Due.</strong></span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The above screen also provides an option to the user to select multiple invoices, receive payments by way of cash or check and deposit the amount to the bank as selected in the Deposit To drop-down list, by entering the amount into the fields provided next to the invoice below the ($) Payment column.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>: The amount entered below the payment column must be greater than zero (0).</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The user can do the payment for the customer using the <strong>Payment Method</strong> field. User has an option to select <strong>Cash</strong> or <strong>Check</strong>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If the user selects <strong>Cash</strong> as payment method, then the user cannot enter the Check number in the<strong>Check Number</strong> text box provided. The <strong>Check Number</strong> text box will be disabled when the user selects the payment option as <strong>Cash</strong> in the <strong>Payment Method</strong> field.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If the user selects <strong>Check</strong> as payment method, then the <strong>Check Number</strong> text box will be displayed in enabled mode that allows the user to enter the check number.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">When the user clicks on Invoice number link available in the Invoice No. column, then the system displays the appropriate invoice details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The <strong>Deposit To</strong> drop-down list will display the list of all banks. Clicking on <strong>Receive Pay</strong> will receive the payment.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>‘Receive Payments Register’ </strong>to know the details of the received payments from the customers. </span></li> </ul> <div><font color="#4a4a4a" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div> </div><div><font><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">INVOICE HISTORY</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Invoices History is an important feature under Customers. <strong>AkkenCloud </strong>provides this concept, which helps you to keep track of all the invoices that are delivered to the customers. You can find the list of records, which gives the details of the delivered invoices accordingly.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To view the invoices history from Accounting home page, click on the Customers link on the left pane of the home page, and select Invoices History link. Result: The Customers screen refreshes by displaying Invoices History screen.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The refreshed screen, displays the following details:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The From date field and To date field automatically displays the period, from when the list of invoices have been delivered. Alternatively, you can use the calendar icon<img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image009.jpg" alt="" class="fr-dii fr-draggable" style="width: 16px; height: 16px;"> to specify the dates.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also edit the <em>From</em> date and <em>To</em> date fields, and click on the <strong>View</strong> link, available beside the calendar icon. The screen refreshes by displaying the list of invoices to be delivered based on the dates specified.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Select Customer field will have the drop down list consisting of the list of customers names, for whom the invoices are delivered. By default all the invoices to be delivered will be shown.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>Print</strong> link to print the invoices. The system refreshes by displaying the invoice in PDF format.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To remove the invoices, select the required invoice records and click <strong>‘Remove Invoices’</strong> <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image092.jpg" alt="" style="cursor: default; width: 15px; height: 13px;" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"> link. Confirm the removal of the invoices in the prompt. The screen refreshes by removing the selected invoice to Create Invoice screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Double click on the desired record to view the complete details of the invoice to be delivered.</span></li> </ol> <div><span style="font-size: medium;"><span style="font-family: 'Times New Roman'; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);"><strong>PRINTING INVOICES</strong></span><br></span></div> </div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>AkkenCloud </strong>allows you to take a hard copy (printed output) of the delivered invoices of the customers.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Printing Single Invoice</span></p> <ol type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required invoice record and click <strong>Print</strong> link available in the <strong>Deliver Invoices/Invoice History</strong> home page. The system refreshes by displaying the invoice in PDF format, as shown below:</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the <strong>PDF</strong> file, click <strong>Print</strong> <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/print_icon.jpg" alt="" style="cursor: default; width: 29px; height: 27px;" class="fr-dii fr-draggable">icon in the toolbar or select <strong>Print</strong> option from <strong>File</strong> menu.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Printing Multiple Invoices</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You can print multiple invoices using <strong>Print</strong> link available in the<strong>Deliver Invoices</strong>and <strong>Invoice History</strong> screens.</span></p> <ol type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required invoice records and click <strong>Print</strong> link. The system displays the following alert message:</span></li></ol> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041504674/original/_HiJqF8_vrUW2PlhP1fLuyebsYhh9Rbv4Q?1501081123" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041504674/original/_HiJqF8_vrUW2PlhP1fLuyebsYhh9Rbv4Q?1501081123" data-fileid="4041504674" data-uniquekey="1501079734128"><br><ol><li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen,</span></li></ol> <ul><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>Yes</strong> to print multiple invoices.</span></li></ul> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>No</strong> to cancel the print process.</span></li></ul> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Follow the process described above to take the printed version of the selected invoices.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041504646/original/1NvVci9hNlrd8NtzzFuSX1cJrRUIx23dqg?1501081089" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041504646/original/1NvVci9hNlrd8NtzzFuSX1cJrRUIx23dqg?1501081089" data-fileid="4041504646" data-uniquekey="1501079734128"></span><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="line-height: 1.3; font-size: medium;"><br></b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>AkkenCloud </strong><span>allows you to preview the details of the generated invoice before delivering the invoice. In order to preview the complete details of the generated invoice, click on the</span><strong>‘Preview’</strong><span> </span><span>link in the Deliver Invoices display screen, which has to be delivered. The Invoice screen refreshes </span><span>by displaying the generated invoice details.</span></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The refreshed screen displays the following details:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The deliver invoice screen has four links in the provided strip bar: <strong>Export, Print</strong>,<strong>Update,</strong>and <strong>Close</strong> links respectively.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The screen displays the final details of the generated invoice that has to be delivered to the customer.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The details displayed in the screen are the same as the details discussed in the <strong>‘View Invoice Details’</strong> topic. Click on the<strong>Export</strong> link to export the delivered invoice details. You can export the invoices either in CSV or PDF format.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>Print</strong> link to print the invoice(s).</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To edit the Time Sheet and Expenses details, click on the date links corresponding to each Time Sheet and Expenses row displayed under Service Date column. </span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>‘Update’</strong> link to modify the changed details in the invoice before delivering. The invoice screen refreshes by displaying the updated invoice in the Deliver Invoice Screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>‘Close’</strong> link to cancel, and returns to Deliver Invoices Screen.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="line-height: 1.3; font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="line-height: 1.3; color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>VIEW GENERATED INVOICE DETAILS</strong></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>AkkenCloud </strong>allows you to view the details of the generated invoices. In order to view the complete details of the generated invoices, double click on the desired record, which has to be delivered. The Deliver Invoices screen refreshes by displaying the generated invoice details.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The refreshed screen displays the following details:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1. The deliver invoice screen has six links in the provided strip bar: <strong>Export, Print, </strong><strong>Recalculate, Update, Preview, </strong>and <strong>Cancel.</strong></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2. The details displayed in the screen are the same as the details discussed in the <strong>‘View Invoice Details’ </strong>topic. </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3. After making the changes in the desired fields, click on the <strong>‘Recalculate’</strong> link.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">4. Click on the <strong>‘Preview’</strong> link, in order to preview the invoice before delivering the invoice. </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">5. Click on the <strong>‘Cancel’</strong> link to cancel, and return to the Deliver Invoices Screen.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">DELIVER INVOICE DETAILS</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>AkkenCloud </strong>allows you to deliver the generated invoices to the customer with Deliver Invoice feature. To deliver an invoice from Accounting home page, click on the Customers link on the left pane of the home page, and select the <strong>Deliver Invoices</strong> link. Result: The Customers screen refreshes by displaying Deliver Invoices screen.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041504703/original/7jX-lowQXGBPF2Sa2BGnbnUO_ssVntHF2g?1501081152" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041504703/original/7jX-lowQXGBPF2Sa2BGnbnUO_ssVntHF2g?1501081152" data-fileid="4041504703" data-uniquekey="1501079734128"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The refreshed screen, displays the following details:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The From date field and To date field automatically displays the period, from when the list of invoices are due to be delivered. Alternatively, you can use the calendar icon<img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image009.jpg" alt="" class="fr-dii fr-draggable" style="width: 16px; height: 16px;"> to specify the dates</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can even edit the <em>From</em> date and <em>To</em> date fields, and click on the <strong>View</strong> link, available beside the calendar icon.<em> Result:</em> The screen refreshes by displaying the list of invoices to be delivered based on the dates specified.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Select Customer field will have the drop down list consisting of the customers names, for whom the invoices are due for delivery. By default the screen shows the list of invoices to be delivered of all the customers.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Deliver Invoices screen will have the following columns respectively: Invoice. No., Customer, Invoice Date, Due Date,($) Balance and Delivery Method.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Under each column, corresponding details of the customers’ invoice are displayed.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>Print</strong> link to print the invoices. The system refreshes by displaying the invoice in PDF format.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also have an option to save the invoice in PDF format by clicking on the <strong>Save</strong> link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Double click on the desired record to view the complete details of the invoice to be delivered. </span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To remove the invoices, select the required invoice records and click <strong>‘Remove Invoices’</strong> <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image092.jpg" alt="" style="cursor: default; width: 15px; height: 13px;" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"> link. Confirm the removal of the invoices in the prompt. The system refreshes by removing the selected invoices from the <strong>Deliver Invoices</strong> screen.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>: You can remove multiple invoices at a time.</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">To deliver an invoice directly, you need to select the particular record by checking the check box, and click on the <strong>‘Deliver Invoice’</strong> link. The screen refreshes after delivering the selected invoice.</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="line-height: 1.3; color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>PREVIEW INVOICE DETAILS</strong></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>AkkenCloud </strong>allows you to preview the details of the invoice before generating the invoice.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To preview the details of the invoice, do the following:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>Preview</strong> link available in the <strong>Invoice Details</strong> screen. The system refreshes and displays the preview of the invoice screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>Generate Invoice</strong> link to generate the invoice. The system refreshes by generating the invoice and displays the Create Invoices screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>Close</strong> link to close the Invoice Preview screen.</span></li> </ol> </div><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> 266150 800 4000012407 2017-07-26T16:22:50-04:00 4004241107 7 2 1 0 Accounting - Customer Invoices 2015-08-21T04:41:08-04:00 12054499 1 2014-04-29T10:30:16-04:00 1 0 CONSULTANTS  Consultants: Consultants are individual vendors, who have approached the organization as a candidate and are referred as consultants. These consultants can either be placed with the organization, or can be placed under a Project. The details of the Consultants are directly drawn from HRM. I. Adding a Consultant To add a consultant, perform the following steps: Select the Consultants option from the Add a Vendor link available in the Vendors home page. The system refreshes and displays the following screen: In the above screen: A. Click “select an existing Candidate” link. The system displays the Search for Candidates screen with Candidates, Applicants and Hiring Management options: The above search screen allows you to search for the candidates from the following sections of the application: Candidates, Applicants, and Hiring Management. Selecting theCandidates option displays all the activeCRM – Candidates who do not have a recruiter contact. Selecting the Applicantsoption displays only applicant records. Applicants that are added to CRM usingAdd to CRM link will not be displayed under Applicants, but are displayed as candidates under Candidates option. Selecting the Hiring Management option displays all the applicants who are forwarded fromApplicant Tracking. Applicants that are added to CRM using Add to CRM link and who are forwarded to Hiring Management are displayed under Candidates option. Select the required option and the candidates belonging to the selected option will be displayed in theSearch for Candidates screen. You can also have an option to search the candidates by Name. Select any existing candidate by clicking on the candidate name. The system displays the Add Candidate screen by populating the selected candidate information. Now, click on Save to save the candidate (Consultants) details, the system refreshes by displaying the candidate record in theVendors home page. B. Click “Create a new Consultant” link. The system displays the Add Candidate screen. Enter the required details of the candidate and click on Save to save the candidate. The system refreshes by displaying the new consultant record in the Vendors home page. Note: The added candidate (Consultant) record will be displayed in HRM – Employee Management as 1099employee.   II. Editing a Consultant To edit a consultant, Highlight the desired record in the Vendors home page and double click on it. The system displays the record in edit mode. Modify the required changes and click on Update to save the new changes.   III. Creating Bills for Consultants To create bill for the consultant, perform the following steps: Create a consultant from the Vendors home page. The newly created consultant will be treated as 1099 employee. Create an assignment for this employee and create a time sheet as well for the same employee and approve it. Once this is done, go to Accounting->Vendors->Create Bills->Consultants – Here select a consultant and specify the bills details and click on Save link to create a bill. CONSULTING VENDOR Consulting Vendors under Accounting refers to vendors, who have supplied their candidates to the organization as contractors. The received contractors are placed under a Project for the organization’s customers. The details of Consulting Vendors are directly drawn from HR.   I. Adding a Consulting Vendor Select the Consulting Vendor option from the Add a Vendor link available in the Vendorshome page. The system refreshes and displays the Consulting Vendor screen: In the above screen: A. Clicking on ‘select an existing company’ link displays the Search for Company screen with options to select CRM – Companies and Accounting – Customers. In the above screen, you can search and select the CRM-Company orAccounting-Customerfor creating the new consulting vendor. Selecting the CRM Companies option will display all the CRM – Companies that are not present in Consulting Vendors. Selecting theAccounting Customers option will display all the Accounting – Customers that are not present in Consulting Vendors. B. Clicking on ‘Create a new Consulting Vendor‘ link will display the Consulting Vendor screen to create a new consulting vendor, as shown below: Specify the new consulting vendor details in the above screen. Click Add Contact link available in the Company Contacts section to add contacts. Click Add Candidate link available in the Company Candidates section to add candidates to the consulting vendor. It is mandatory to add candidate(s) to the consulting vendor.  In the new consulting vendor screen, Click on Add Candidate link in the Company Candidates section. The system displays the following screen: In the above screen, click on select an existing Candidate link. The system displays the Search for Candidates screen:   The above search screen allows you to search for the candidates from the following sections of the application:Candidates, Applicants, Hiring Management and Employee Management. Selecting theCandidatesoption displays all the activeCRM – Candidates who do not have a recruiter contact. Selecting the Applicants option displays only applicant records. Applicants that are added to CRM using Add to CRM link will not be displayed under Applicants, but are displayed as candidates under Candidates option. Selecting the Hiring Management option displays all the applicants who are forwarded from Applicant Tracking. Applicants that are added to CRM using Add to CRM link and who are forwarded to Hiring Management are displayed under Candidates option. Selecting the Employee Management option displays all the “1099” and “C-to-C”employees who do not have a vendor. (No information is populated in HRM – Employee Management – HR Data Tab – Tax Deductions screen). Select the required option and the candidates belonging to the selected option will be displayed in the Search for Candidates screen. You can also have an option to search the candidates by Name. Select any existing candidate by clicking on the candidate name. The system displays the Add Candidate screen by populating the selected candidate information. Now, click on Save to save the candidate details, the system refreshes by displaying the candidate in the Company Candidates section. Note: When you click on Create a new Candidate link. The system displays the Add Candidate screen. Enter the required details of the candidate and click on Save to save the candidate. Once saved, the candidate record will be displayed in: Company Candidates section of the Consulting Vendor screen. HRM – Employee Management as C-to-C employee. Note: If you select an existing CRM – Company or Accounting – Customer associated with CRM – Company and if the company contacts have associated candidates (Candidates with Recruiter Contact), then by default those candidates will be displayed in the Company Candidates section. Click Save. The system refreshes and displays the new consulting vendor in the Vendors home page and the added candidate(s) for the vendor will be displayed in the HRM – Employee Management asC-to-C employees along with vendor information populated in the Tax Deductions section. Click Close link to close the Consulting Vendor screen. Note: When you update the vendor information in HRM – Employee Management - Tax Deductions section, then the updated information will be reflected in the corresponding Consulting Vendor in the Vendorshome page and vice versa. If you update the company information either from CRM – Companies / Accounting – Customers, then the corresponding employees Tax Deductions sections will get updated. This will be applicable only if the employees are of C-to-C type and there exists an association between CRM – Companies andAccounting – Customers.   Note: If you add a candidate to consulting vendor and save, then the corresponding consulting vendor company information will be populated in the HRM – Employee Management – Tax Deductions section under C-to-C tax option for the added candidate. In HRM – Employee Management – When you change the tax type option for a C-to-Cemployee, the system displays the following message:   In the above screen: Click OK to remove the association between the candidate and its corresponding consulting vendor. Click Cancel to cancel the alert message and return back to Tax Deductions screen. In HRM – Hiring Management – When you hire a candidate as C-to-C employee with the company information entered in the Tax Deductions section, the system will display the company as Consulting Vendor with corresponding employee as C-to-C in the Vendorshome page. If you do not specify the company information in HRM – Hiring Management – Tax Deductions section, no consulting vendor will be created. The hired candidate will be displayed in the Candidate Search screen for adding into Consulting Vendor. When you delete a candidate associated with a Consulting Vendor, the tax type option for the deleted candidate is displayed as None in the HRM – Employee Management.   II. Editing a Consulting Vendor To edit a consulting vendor, Highlight the desired record in the Vendors home page and double click on it. The system displays the record in edit mode. Modify the required changes and click on Update to save the new changes. Make sure that you have the candidates added for the consulting vendor to update it. Click Close to close the consulting vendor screen. If the vendor doesn’t have any candidates added, then clicking Close link will remove the consulting vendor from the Vendors home page.   III. Creating Bills for Consulting Vendors To create bills for the consulting vendors, perform the following steps: Create a new Consulting Vendor: While creating a new consulting vendor, you are required to add the candidates for the consulting vendor which will be treated as C-to-Cemployees in the application. Once you have successfully created a consulting vendor by adding the candidates (C-to-C Employees). Create an assignment for the C-to-C employee and also create a new time sheet for the employee and approve it. Once the assignment is created and time sheet is approved, go to Vendors->Create Bills->Consulting vendor – Here select the consulting vendor name from the drop-down list. The system refreshes and displays the Create Bills screen. In the Create Bills screen, select the items and its corresponding service dates and also specify the bill amount details and finally click on Save link to create the bill. Once the bill is saved, it displays in Receive Bills section and then in Bills History. GENERAL VENDOR In Akken Staffing, the term General Vendors under Accounting refers to the specific type of vendors, who are common suppliers of all purpose goods to the organization. To explain in brief, these vendors can either be some merchants, who will supply or take care of any general services for the organization.   I. Adding a General Vendor Select the General Vendor option from the Add a Vendor link available in the Vendorshome page. The system refreshes and displays the screen to add the general vendor. Enter the required details in the general vendor screen and click on Save to save the new general vendor. The system refreshes and displays the newly created vendor in the Vendorshome page.   II. Editing General Vendor Highlight the desired record in the Vendors home page, and double click on it. The system displays the record in edit mode. Modify the required changes and click on Update to save the new changes.   III. Creating Bills for General Vendors To create bills for general vendors, perform the following steps: Go to Accounting->Vendors – Click on Create Bills sub-module available under theVendors module. The system refreshes and displays the Create Bills screen. In the Create Bills screen, by default General Vendors will be selected as Vendor Type. Select the Vendor Name from the Vendor Name drop-down list. The system refreshes and displays the screen with the vendor details. Select the items to be billed for general vendors or create a new item by clicking on Add New Item link if there are no items available in the Item drop-down list. Specify all the required bill details and click on Save link to create the bill. Before clicking Save, click onRecalculate link to recalculate the billed amount. Click on Cancel to cancel the Create Bills screen. Once the bill is saved, it disappears from the Create Bills section and displays in Receive Bills section. In the Receive Bills section, open the bill that is created and click on Save link. The system saves the bill and displays it in Bills History section. In the Bills History section, you can open the created bills and view the history details. To pay for the created bills, go to Pay Bills section and select the vendor for whom you want to pay the bill. The system refreshes and displays the bill details for the selected vendor. Select the bill details record and also specify to which bank account the pay has to be delivered and finally click on Pay Bill link. The system refreshes by paying the bill to the concerned vendor. You can see the bill paid details in the Bill Payment Register. VENDOR - HOME Select the Vendors link from menu bar, or from the left menu to display the Vendors home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the Vendors’ home page. In the Vendors home page, you can view the list of vendors and their corresponding due amounts, who are associated with your organization. The Add a Vendor is a link. It contains the following options: General Vendor, Consulting Vendor and Consultant. The details of the vendors are displayed under the following columns: Vendor, Type, ($) current, ($) 1-30, ($) 31- 60, ($) 61-90, ($) > 90 and ($) Total Due. Columns like ($) current, ($) 1-30, ($) 31- 60, ($) 61-90 and ($) > 90 will display the amounts that are due for that particular period. All the amounts that are due will be displayed as a link. You can click on a link to view the payment particulars. The Total Due column will display the total amount due from the corresponding vendor. Total Due can be calculated as follows: ($) Total due = ($) current + ($) 1-30 + ($) 31- 60 + ($) 61-90 + ($) > 90. Clicking on a link (as displayed in the ($) current, ($) 1-30, ($) 31- 60, ($) 61-90 and ($) > 90 columns) will display the payments that are due from the customer. These columns will display the receivables like the list of invoices for a particular period and the payments received for those invoices. You can click on a Bill or Pay Bill record in the Vendor Payables screen to view its corresponding bill or pay bill details. To view the details of the due amount that has to be paid to the vendors, click on the respective amount link corresponding to each vendor name. The screen refreshes by displaying the details of the payments that are due to be paid to the vendor.  In order to view the details of the vendor, highlight the desired record, and double click on the record. The screen refreshes by displaying the details of the selected vendor. Irrespective of the vendor type, the Vendors menu provides the following features: · Create Bills · Receive Bills · Bills History · Pay bills DEFINING VENDORS Vendors feature in Accounting is an essential feature, which allows you to interrelate with the organization’s vendors, in order to keep track of the financial transactions of the various vendors of the organization. Akken Staffing allows you to do the financial dealings of the organization with the vendors in a very comfortable manner with the help of Vendors feature in Accounting. With respect to Accounting in this application, Vendors can be categorized as three types. They are: General Vendors: General Vendors under Accounting refers to the specific type of vendors, who are common suppliers of all-purpose goods to the organization. To explain in brief, these vendors can either be some merchants, who will supply or take care of any general services for the organization. Consulting Vendors (C-to-C): Consulting Vendors under Accounting refers to vendors, who have supplied their candidates to the organization as contractors. The received contractors are placed under a Project for the organization’s customers. The details of Consulting Vendors are directly drawn from HR. Consultants (1099): Consultants are individual vendors, who have approached the organization as a candidate and are referred as consultants. These consultants can either be placed with the organization, or can be placed under a Project. The details of the Consultants are directly drawn from HR. <p><span style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);"><strong>CONSULTANTS </strong></span></p><p><br></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Consultants</strong>: Consultants are individual vendors, who have approached the organization as a candidate and are referred as consultants. These consultants can either be placed with the organization, or can be placed under a Project. The details of the Consultants are directly drawn from HRM.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>I. Adding a Consultant</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To add a consultant, perform the following steps:</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the <strong>Consultants</strong> option from the <strong>Add a Vendor</strong> link available in the <strong>Vendors</strong> home page. The system refreshes and displays the following screen:</span></li></ol><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505187/original/IxUe-VnoMKyins038XQd_FvayV7bQV9yhQ?1501081842" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505187/original/IxUe-VnoMKyins038XQd_FvayV7bQV9yhQ?1501081842" data-fileid="4041505187" data-uniquekey="1501081833041"></p><ol><li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen:</span></li></ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>A.</strong> Click <strong>“select an existing Candidate”</strong> link. The system displays the <strong>Search for Candidates</strong> screen with Candidates, Applicants and Hiring Management options:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505243/original/8zXqsarziMb5TGCwwIJE3skBOEwcgrv4Ww?1501081902" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505243/original/8zXqsarziMb5TGCwwIJE3skBOEwcgrv4Ww?1501081902" data-fileid="4041505243" data-uniquekey="1501081833041"></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li> <span style="font-size: medium;">The above search screen allows you to search for the candidates from the following sections of the application: <strong>Candidates, Applicants</strong>, and<strong> Hiring Management.</strong></span><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;" type="circle"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the<strong>Candidates</strong> option displays all the active<strong>CRM – Candidates</strong> who do not have a recruiter contact.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the <strong>Applicants</strong>option displays only applicant records. Applicants that are added to CRM using<strong>Add to CRM</strong> link will not be displayed under <strong>Applicants</strong>, but are displayed as candidates under <strong>Candidates</strong> option.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the <strong>Hiring Management</strong> option displays all the applicants who are forwarded from<strong>Applicant Tracking</strong>. Applicants that are added to CRM using <strong>Add to CRM</strong> link and who are forwarded to <strong>Hiring Management</strong> are displayed under <strong>Candidates</strong> option.</span></li> </ul> </li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required option and the candidates belonging to the selected option will be displayed in the<strong>Search for Candidate</strong>s screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also have an option to search the candidates by <strong>Name</strong>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select any existing candidate by clicking on the candidate name. The system displays the <strong>Add Candidate</strong> screen by populating the selected candidate information. Now, click on <strong>Save</strong> to save the candidate (Consultants) details, the system refreshes by displaying the candidate record in the<strong>Vendors</strong> home page.</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>B. </strong>Click<strong> “Create a new Consultant”</strong> link. The system displays the <strong>Add Candidate</strong> screen. Enter the required details of the candidate and click on <strong>Save</strong> to save the candidate. The system refreshes by displaying the new consultant record in the <strong>Vendors</strong> home page.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>: The added candidate (Consultant) record will be displayed in <strong>HRM – Employee Management</strong> as <strong>1099</strong>employee.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>II. Editing a Consultant</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To edit a consultant,</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Highlight the desired record in the <strong>Vendors</strong> home page and double click on it. The system displays the record in edit mode.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Modify the required changes and click on <strong>Update</strong> to save the new changes.</span></li> </ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>III. Creating Bills for Consultants</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To create bill for the consultant, perform the following steps:</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Create a consultant from the Vendors home page. The newly created consultant will be treated as <strong>1099</strong> employee.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Create an assignment for this employee and create a time sheet as well for the same employee and approve it. Once this is done, go to <strong>Accounting-&gt;Vendors-&gt;Create Bills-&gt;Consultants</strong> – Here select a consultant and specify the bills details and click on <strong>Save</strong> link to create a bill.</span></li> </ol><div><font color="#000000" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div><div><font><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">CONSULTING VENDOR</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Consulting Vendors under Accounting refers to vendors, who have supplied their candidates to the organization as contractors. The received contractors are placed under a Project for the organization’s customers. The details of Consulting Vendors are directly drawn from HR.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">I. Adding a Consulting Vendor</b></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the <strong>Consulting Vendor</strong> option from the <strong>Add a Vendor</strong> link available in the <strong>Vendors</strong>home page. The system refreshes and displays the <strong>Consulting Vendor</strong> screen:</span></li></ol> <div><font color="#000000" size="3"><span><br></span></font></div> <div><font color="#000000" size="3"><span><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505265/original/xhTGrZRjD9FPlbR0oyx4MorefKUXalmA4w?1501081950" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505265/original/xhTGrZRjD9FPlbR0oyx4MorefKUXalmA4w?1501081950" data-fileid="4041505265" data-uniquekey="1501081833041"></p></span></font></div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen:</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>A.</strong> Clicking on ‘<strong>select an existing company’</strong> link displays the <strong>Search for</strong> <strong>Company </strong>screen with options to select <strong>CRM – Companies</strong> and <strong>Accounting – Customers</strong>.</span></p> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505296/original/3pjHwHtSfZDskiCcDvzZmn9wcqrwCcXU_A?1501081994" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505296/original/3pjHwHtSfZDskiCcDvzZmn9wcqrwCcXU_A?1501081994" data-fileid="4041505296" data-uniquekey="1501081833041"><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen, you can search and select the <strong>CRM-Company </strong>or<strong>Accounting-Customer</strong>for creating the new consulting vendor.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the <strong>CRM Companies</strong> option will display all the CRM – Companies that are not present in Consulting Vendors.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the<strong>Accounting Customers</strong> option will display all the Accounting – Customers that are not present in Consulting Vendors.</span></li> </ul> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;"><br></b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>B.</strong> Clicking on ‘<strong>Create a new Consulting Vendor</strong>‘ link will display the Consulting Vendor screen to create a new consulting vendor, as shown below:</span></p> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505345/original/EqHQ6J-wv5hr7J76ILDn74dUEIALlZj7Ng?1501082033" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505345/original/EqHQ6J-wv5hr7J76ILDn74dUEIALlZj7Ng?1501082033" data-fileid="4041505345" data-uniquekey="1501081833041"><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the new consulting vendor details in the above screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>Add Contact</strong> link available in the <strong>Company Contacts</strong> section to add contacts.</span></li> <li> <span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>Add Candidate</strong> link available in the <strong>Company Candidates</strong> section to add candidates to the consulting vendor. It is mandatory to add candidate(s) to the consulting vendor. </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the new consulting vendor screen,</span></p> <ol type="1"> <li> <span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>Add Candidate</strong> link in the Company Candidates section. The system displays the following screen:</span><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505393/original/pvSg26NVVLnG-vpl3n93GnLXAT1rSnNriw?1501082112" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505393/original/pvSg26NVVLnG-vpl3n93GnLXAT1rSnNriw?1501082112" data-fileid="4041505393" data-uniquekey="1501081833041"> </li> <li> <span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen, click on <strong>select an existing Candidate</strong> link. The system displays the Search for Candidates screen:<strong><br></strong></span> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505416/original/zsgiCiRptWk2ar9Rxq2hDhbYW6ZkawCTzg?1501082145" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505416/original/zsgiCiRptWk2ar9Rxq2hDhbYW6ZkawCTzg?1501082145" data-fileid="4041505416" data-uniquekey="1501081833041"> </li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The above search screen allows you to search for the candidates from the following sections of the application:<strong>Candidates, Applicants, Hiring Management </strong>and<strong> Employee Management.</strong></span></li> </ol> </li> <li> <br><ol><li> <br><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the<strong>Candidates</strong>option displays all the active<strong>CRM – Candidates</strong> who do not have a recruiter contact.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the <strong>Applicants</strong> option displays only applicant records. Applicants that are added to CRM using <strong>Add to CRM</strong> link will not be displayed under <strong>Applicants</strong>, but are displayed as candidates under <strong>Candidates</strong> option.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the <strong>Hiring Management</strong> option displays all the applicants who are forwarded from <strong>Applicant Tracking</strong>. Applicants that are added to CRM using <strong>Add to CRM</strong> link and who are forwarded to Hiring Management are displayed under <strong>Candidates</strong> option.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the <strong>Employee Management</strong> option displays all the <strong>“1099”</strong> and “<strong>C-to-C”</strong>employees who do not have a vendor. (No information is populated in <strong>HRM – Employee Management – HR Data Tab – Tax Deductions screen</strong>).</span></li> </ul> </li></ol> </li> <li> <br><ol type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required option and the candidates belonging to the selected option will be displayed in the <strong>Search for Candidate</strong>s screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also have an option to search the candidates by <strong>Name</strong>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select any existing candidate by clicking on the candidate name. The system displays the <strong>Add Candidate</strong> screen by populating the selected candidate information. Now, click on <strong>Save</strong> to save the candidate details, the system refreshes by displaying the candidate in the <strong>Company Candidates</strong> section.</span></li> </ol> </li> <li> <p><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>: When you click on <strong>Create a new Candidate</strong> link. The system displays the <strong>Add Candidate</strong> screen. Enter the required details of the candidate and click on <strong>Save</strong> to save the candidate. Once saved, the candidate record will be displayed in:</span></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Company Candidates</strong> section of the <strong>Consulting Vendor</strong> screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>HRM – Employee Management</strong> as <strong>C-to-C</strong> employee.</span></li> </ul> </li> </ul> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note:</strong> If you select an existing CRM – Company or Accounting – Customer associated with CRM – Company and if the company contacts have associated candidates (Candidates with Recruiter Contact), then by default those candidates will be displayed in the Company Candidates section.</span></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>Save</strong>. The system refreshes and displays the new consulting vendor in the <strong>Vendors</strong> home page and the added candidate(s) for the vendor will be displayed in the <strong>HRM – Employee Management</strong> as<strong>C-to-C</strong> employees along with vendor information populated in the <strong>Tax Deductions</strong> section.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>Close</strong> link to close the <strong>Consulting Vendor</strong> screen.</span></li> </ul> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>:</span></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="circle"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">When you update the vendor information in <strong>HRM – Employee Management -</strong> <strong>Tax Deductions</strong> section, then the updated information will be reflected in the corresponding Consulting Vendor in the <strong>Vendors</strong>home page and vice versa.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you update the company information either from <strong>CRM – Companies / Accounting – Customers</strong>, then the corresponding employees <strong>Tax Deductions</strong> sections will get updated. This will be applicable only if the employees are of <strong>C-to-C</strong> type and there exists an association between <strong>CRM – Companies </strong>and<strong>Accounting – Customers</strong>.</span></li> </ul> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Note:</b></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you add a candidate to consulting vendor and save, then the corresponding consulting vendor company information will be populated in the <strong>HRM – Employee Management – Tax Deductions</strong> section under <strong>C-to-C</strong> tax option for the added candidate.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In <strong>HRM – Employee Management</strong> – When you change the tax type option for a <strong>C-to-C</strong>employee, the system displays the following message:</span></li> </ol> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505476/original/jsDqmnOZQuBXuzvXaYMAuV6H7ouWYxY8gw?1501082255" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505476/original/jsDqmnOZQuBXuzvXaYMAuV6H7ouWYxY8gw?1501082255" data-fileid="4041505476" data-uniquekey="1501081833041"><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen:</span></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li> <br><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>OK</strong> to remove the association between the candidate and its corresponding consulting vendor.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>Cancel</strong> to cancel the alert message and return back to <strong>Tax Deductions</strong> screen.</span></li> </ul> </li></ul> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In <strong>HRM – Hiring Management</strong> – When you hire a candidate as C-to-C employee with the company information entered in the <strong>Tax Deductions</strong> section, the system will display the company as <strong>Consulting Vendor</strong> with corresponding employee as <strong>C-to-C</strong> in the <strong>Vendors</strong>home page. If you do not specify the company information in <strong>HRM – Hiring Management – Tax Deductions</strong> section, no consulting vendor will be created. The hired candidate will be displayed in the <strong>Candidate Search</strong> screen for adding into <strong>Consulting Vendor</strong>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">When you delete a candidate associated with a Consulting Vendor, the tax type option for the deleted candidate is displayed as <strong>None</strong> in the <strong>HRM – Employee Management</strong>.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">II. Editing a Consulting Vendor</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To edit a consulting vendor,</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Highlight the desired record in the <strong>Vendors</strong> home page and double click on it. The system displays the record in edit mode.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Modify the required changes and click on <strong>Update</strong> to save the new changes. Make sure that you have the candidates added for the consulting vendor to update it.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>Close</strong> to close the consulting vendor screen. If the vendor doesn’t have any candidates added, then clicking <strong>Close</strong> link will remove the consulting vendor from the <strong>Vendors</strong> home page.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">III. Creating Bills for Consulting Vendors</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To create bills for the consulting vendors, perform the following steps:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Create a new Consulting Vendor</strong>: While creating a new consulting vendor, you are required to add the candidates for the consulting vendor which will be treated as <strong>C-to-C</strong>employees in the application.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Once you have successfully created a consulting vendor by adding the candidates (<strong>C-to-C Employees</strong>). Create an assignment for the <strong>C-to-C</strong> employee and also create a new time sheet for the employee and approve it.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Once the assignment is created and time sheet is approved, go to <strong>Vendors-&gt;Create Bills-&gt;Consulting vendor</strong> – Here select the consulting vendor name from the drop-down list. The system refreshes and displays the <strong>Create Bills</strong> screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the <strong>Create Bills</strong> screen, select the items and its corresponding service dates and also specify the bill amount details and finally click on <strong>Save</strong> link to create the bill.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Once the bill is saved, it displays in <strong>Receive Bills</strong> section and then in <strong>Bills History</strong>.</span></li> </ol> <div><font color="#000000" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div> </div><div><font><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">GENERAL VENDOR</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In <strong>Akken Staffing</strong>, the term General Vendors under Accounting refers to the specific type of vendors, who are common suppliers of all purpose goods to the organization. To explain in brief, these vendors can either be some merchants, who will supply or take care of any general services for the organization.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>I. Adding a General Vendor</strong></span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the <strong>General Vendor</strong> option from the <strong>Add a Vendor</strong> link available in the <strong>Vendors</strong>home page. The system refreshes and displays the screen to add the general vendor.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the required details in the general vendor screen and click on <strong>Save</strong> to save the new general vendor. The system refreshes and displays the newly created vendor in the <strong>Vendors</strong>home page.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> <img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505459/original/_rCAiBbdhmVNTsInKWKXNoSjRyCo-cHq6g?1501082204" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505459/original/_rCAiBbdhmVNTsInKWKXNoSjRyCo-cHq6g?1501082204" data-fileid="4041505459" data-uniquekey="1501081833041"></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>II. Editing General Vendor</strong></span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Highlight the desired record in the <strong>Vendors</strong> home page, and double click on it. The system displays the record in edit mode.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Modify the required changes and click on <strong>Update</strong> to save the new changes.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>III. Creating Bills for General Vendors</strong></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To create bills for general vendors, perform the following steps:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Go to <strong>Accounting-&gt;Vendors</strong> – Click on <strong>Create Bills</strong> sub-module available under the<strong>Vendors</strong> module. The system refreshes and displays the <strong>Create Bills</strong> screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the <strong>Create Bills</strong> screen, by default <strong>General Vendors</strong> will be selected as <strong>Vendor</strong> Type. Select the Vendor Name from the <strong>Vendor Name</strong> drop-down list. The system refreshes and displays the screen with the vendor details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the items to be billed for general vendors or create a new item by clicking on <strong>Add New Item</strong> link if there are no items available in the Item drop-down list. Specify all the required bill details and click on <strong>Save</strong> link to create the bill. Before clicking <strong>Save</strong>, click on<strong>Recalculate</strong> link to recalculate the billed amount.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>Cancel</strong> to cancel the <strong>Create Bills</strong> screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Once the bill is saved, it disappears from the <strong>Create Bills</strong> section and displays in <strong>Receive Bills</strong> section.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the <strong>Receive Bills</strong> section, open the bill that is created and click on <strong>Save</strong> link. The system saves the bill and displays it in <strong>Bills History</strong> section.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the <strong>Bills History</strong> section, you can open the created bills and view the history details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To pay for the created bills, go to <strong>Pay Bills</strong> section and select the vendor for whom you want to pay the bill. The system refreshes and displays the bill details for the selected vendor.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the bill details record and also specify to which bank account the pay has to be delivered and finally click on <strong>Pay Bill</strong> link. The system refreshes by paying the bill to the concerned vendor.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can see the bill paid details in the Bill Payment Register.</span></li> </ol> <div><font color="#000000" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div> </div><div><font><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">VENDOR - HOME</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the<strong> Vendors</strong> link from menu bar, or from the left menu to display the <strong>Vendors</strong> home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the Vendors’ home page.</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the Vendors home page, you can view the list of vendors and their corresponding due amounts, who are associated with your organization.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Add a Vendor is a link. It contains the following options: <strong>General Vendor, Consulting Vendor </strong>and<strong> Consultant.</strong></span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The details of the vendors are displayed under the following columns: Vendor, Type, ($) current, ($) 1-30, ($) 31- 60, ($) 61-90, ($) &gt; 90 and ($) Total Due.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Columns like ($) current, ($) 1-30, ($) 31- 60, ($) 61-90 and ($) &gt; 90 will display the amounts that are due for that particular period. All the amounts that are due will be displayed as a link. You can click on a link to view the payment particulars.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Total Due column will display the total amount due from the corresponding vendor.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Total Due can be calculated as follows: <strong>($) Total due = ($) current + ($) 1-30 + ($) 31- 60 + ($) 61-90 + ($) &gt; 90.</strong></span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Clicking on a link (as displayed in the ($) current, ($) 1-30, ($) 31- 60, ($) 61-90 and ($) &gt; 90 columns) will display the payments that are due from the customer. These columns will display the receivables like the list of invoices for a particular period and the payments received for those invoices. You can click on a Bill or Pay Bill record in the Vendor Payables screen to view its corresponding bill or pay bill details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To view the details of the due amount that has to be paid to the vendors, click on the respective amount link corresponding to each vendor name. The screen refreshes by displaying the details of the payments that are due to be paid to the vendor.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;"> In order to view the details of the vendor, highlight the desired record, and double click on the record. The screen refreshes by displaying the details of the selected vendor.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Irrespective of the vendor type, the Vendors menu provides the following features:</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">· Create Bills</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">· Receive Bills</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">· Bills History</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">· Pay bills</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>DEFINING VENDORS</strong></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Vendors feature in Accounting is an essential feature, which allows you to interrelate with the organization’s vendors, in order to keep track of the financial transactions of the various vendors of the organization.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Akken Staffing </strong>allows you to do the financial dealings of the organization with the vendors in a very comfortable manner with the help of Vendors feature in Accounting. With respect to Accounting in this application, Vendors can be categorized as three types. They are:</span></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>General Vendors: </strong>General Vendors under Accounting refers to the specific type of vendors, who are common suppliers of all-purpose goods to the organization. To explain in brief, these vendors can either be some merchants, who will supply or take care of any general services for the organization.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong><strong>Consulting Vendors (C-to-C): </strong></strong>Consulting Vendors under Accounting refers to vendors, who have supplied their candidates to the organization as contractors. The received contractors are placed under a Project for the organization’s customers. The details of Consulting Vendors are directly drawn from HR.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Consultants (1099): </strong>Consultants are individual vendors, who have approached the organization as a candidate and are referred as consultants. These consultants can either be placed with the organization, or can be placed under a Project. The details of the Consultants are directly drawn from HR.</span></li> </ul> <div><font color="#4a4a4a" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div> </div><div><font color="#4a4a4a"><br></font></div> 266150 486 4000012428 2017-07-26T11:18:20-04:00 4004241107 8 2 1 0 Accounting - Vendors 2015-08-21T04:41:08-04:00 12054499 1 2014-04-29T10:37:23-04:00 5 1 DEFINING EMPLOYEES Employees feature in Accounting is a very important feature, which allows you to interact with the organization’s employees, in order to keep track of the financial transactions of the employees. AkkenCloud allows you to do the financial dealings with the employees in a very comfortable manner with the help of this feature in Accounting. Employees feature helps you to create payrolls for the employees, by calculating all the benefits and deductions of the corresponding employee. Also the feature allows you to maintain a register of all the payments that are paid to the employees. EMPLOYEES - HOME In the Employees home page, you will find the list of Employees’ Names, and the corresponding payment amount, which gives an overview of the amount, that is associated with the corresponding employees. These lists of employees’ Names are automatically generated, when the employees’ information is entered in the HRM module. The list of employees name displayed here can either be the employees who are directly working under your organization, or employees of your organization who are working under a project. In the Employees home page, you can find the following: 1. Select From and To fields will display one month period from current date. Alternatively, you can use the calendar icon to specify the dates. 2. The screen has the following columns: Employee ID, Employee Name, Title, Location, Department, Hire Date, Job Status and Status. 3. The below table explains the purpose of each column displayed in the Employee home page: COLUMN PURPOSE Employee ID Displays the employee ID. The Employee ID will be tracked by the system while hiring a new candidate in HRMHiring Management. Employee Name Displays the employee name. Title Displays the employee’s designation. Location Displays the working location of the employee. Department Displays the department where the employee is working. Hire Date Displays the hire date of the employee. Job Status Displays the job status of employee as either On Bench/On Vacation/Project/Administrative Staff. Status Displays the status of the employee as eitherActive/Terminated.  Note: When the user terminates the employee in HRM->Compensation screen, still the user can see the terminated employee with status as Terminated in Employees home page. In order to view the Profile Data, and HR Data of the employee, highlight the desired employee record, and double click to view the details. See the Employee Details topic for more details. The ‘Employee Register’ link displayed in the provided strip bar will have the details of the employees’ payments. See Employee Register topic for more details. See the Paging options topic to know, how to use the paging options displayed at the bottom of the Employees home page. PAY EMPLOYEES The Pay Employees home page displays the list of all W-2 employees of the Organization. The table below explains the purpose of each field/column displayed in the Pay Employees home page. Field/Column Purpose Select an Employee This column contains the list of employees for whom you want to generate the pay stub. You can select any employee from the ‘Select an Employee‘ drop-down list and view corresponding earnings. Pay Period ‘From’ field This field displays the date based on the payroll period set in the Payroll Setup screen. Pay Period ‘To’ field This field displays the current date. Employee Name Displays the name of the employee. Employee ID Displays the ID of the employee. Phone Displays the phone number of the employee. SSN (Social Security Number) Displays the social security number of the employee. Gross Earnings Displays the total earnings of the employee.  Earnings can be calculated as follows: Earnings = (Regular Hours * Regular Rate) + (Overtime Hours * Overtime Rate) + (Double time Hours * Double time Rate) Note: Time sheets created using the Create Multiple Timesheets link cannot be used for earnings calculation (i.e. for generating the gross pay). In the Create Timesheet screen, the hours entered for the individual days will only be used for earnings calculation. Gross pay can be generated only for the individual days as shown in the above screen. Weekly, Monthly and Yearly rates are converted to hourly rate while calculating earnings. If you select Flat Fee as the Rate, then the earnings calculation will be done based on the entered Flat Fee value.   Viewing Employee Time Sheet Hours To view employee details, double-click on an employee record in the Pay Employees home page. The system displays the following screen. In the above screen: You can view the list of approved time sheet hours for the individual days. Double click on any time sheet record to view its details. EMPLOYEE DETAILS In order to view the Profile Data, and HR Data of the employee, highlight the desired employee record from employee home page, and double click to view the details. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying Employee Management pop-up window, as shown below. The pop-up window has 2 tabs: Profile Data, and HR Data tabs respectively. By default, the Profile Data tab is highlighted. In Profile Data tab, you can see Candidate Info, and Contact Info tabs respectively. The Candidate Info tab displays following: In the Candidate Info tab, you can view the details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the candidate Click on the ‘Update’ link to implement the changes made. Click on the ‘Close’ link to close the pop-up window. Click on the Contact Info tab to view the details of the candidate’s contact information. The Contact Info tab displays following: 1. In the Contact Info tab, you can view the contact details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the contacts 2. Click on the ‘Update’ link to implement the changes made. 3. Click on the ‘Close’ link to close the pop-up window. 4. Click on the HR Data tab to view the HR details of the candidate. In HR Data  tab, you can see Compensation, Personal Profile, and Tax Deductions tabs respectively.   Compensation Tab pop up window The Compensation tab displays the following: 1. In the Compensation tab, you can view the reimbursement details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the compensation. 2. Click on the ‘Update’ link to implement the changes made. 3. Click on the ‘Close’ link to close the pop-up window. 4. Click on the Personal Profile tab to view the personal details of the candidate.    Personal Profile Tab pop up window The Personal Profile tab displays following: 1. In the Personal Profile tab, you can view the personal details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the candidate. 2. Click on the ‘Update’ link to implement the changes made. 3. Click on the ‘Close’ link to close the pop-up window. 4. Click on the Tax Deductions tab to view the tax details of the candidate.   Tax Deductions Tab pop up window The Tax Deductions tab displays following: 1. In the Tax Deductions tab, you can view the tax details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the tax information. 2. Click on the ‘Update’ link to implement the changes made. 3. Click on the ‘Close’ link to close the pop-up window. <p><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">DEFINING EMPLOYEES</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Employees feature in Accounting is a very important feature, which allows you to interact with the organization’s employees, in order to keep track of the financial transactions of the employees.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>AkkenCloud </strong>allows you to do the financial dealings with the employees in a very comfortable manner with the help of this feature in Accounting. Employees feature helps you to create payrolls for the employees, by calculating all the benefits and deductions of the corresponding employee. Also the feature allows you to maintain a register of all the payments that are paid to the employees.</span></p><p><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p><p><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">EMPLOYEES - HOME</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the Employees home page, you will find the list of Employees’ Names, and the corresponding payment amount, which gives an overview of the amount, that is associated with the corresponding employees. These lists of employees’ Names are automatically generated, when the employees’ information is entered in the HRM module. The list of employees name displayed here can either be the employees who are directly working under your organization, or employees of your organization who are working under a project.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the Employees home page, you can find the following:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1. Select From and To fields will display one month period from current date. Alternatively, you can use the calendar icon<img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image009.jpg" alt="" class="fr-dii fr-draggable" style="width: 16px; height: 16px;"> to specify the dates.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2. The screen has the following columns: <strong>Employee ID, Employee Name, Title, Location, Department, Hire Date, Job Status </strong>and<strong> Status.</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3. The below table explains the purpose of each column displayed in the Employee home page:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p><table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" width="626"><tbody> <tr> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">COLUMN</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">PURPOSE</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Employee ID</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the employee ID. The Employee ID will be tracked by the system while hiring a new candidate in HRMHiring Management.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Employee Name</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the employee name.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Title</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the employee’s designation.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Location</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the working location of the employee.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Department</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the department where the employee is working.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Hire Date</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the hire date of the employee.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Job Status</span></td> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the job status of employee as either On Bench/On Vacation/Project/Administrative Staff.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="50%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Status</span></td> <td width="50%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the status of the employee as either<strong>Active/Terminated</strong>. </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>: When the user terminates the employee in HRM-&gt;Compensation screen, still the user can see the terminated employee with status as Terminated in Employees home page.</span></p> </td> </tr> </tbody></table><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In order to view the Profile Data, and HR Data of the employee, highlight the desired employee record, and double click to view the details. See the <strong><a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Employee_Details.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Employee Details</a></strong> topic for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The <strong>‘Employee Register’</strong> link displayed in the provided strip bar will have the details of the employees’ payments. See <strong><a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Employee_Register.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Employee Register</a></strong> topic for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">See the <strong><a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Paging_Options.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Paging options</a></strong> topic to know, how to use the paging options displayed at the bottom of the Employees home page.</span></li> </ol><p><br></p><div><font color="#000000" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div><p><br></p><div><font><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">PAY EMPLOYEES</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The <strong>Pay Employees</strong> home page displays the list of all <strong>W-2</strong> employees of the Organization.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505759/original/jNelNNmPdTTLXA_7cvZdqIDGfdJB_i_IJA?1501082622" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041505759/original/jNelNNmPdTTLXA_7cvZdqIDGfdJB_i_IJA?1501082622" data-fileid="4041505759" data-uniquekey="1501082577898"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The table below explains the purpose of each field/column displayed in the <strong>Pay Employees</strong> home page.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <table cellspacing="0" width="731"><tbody> <tr> <td width="26.214%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Field/Column</span></td> <td width="73.786%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Purpose</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="26.214%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Select an Employee</span></td> <td width="73.786%"><span style="font-size: medium;">This column contains the list of employees for whom you want to generate the pay stub. You can select any employee from the ‘<strong>Select an Employee</strong>‘ drop-down list and view corresponding earnings.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="26.214%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Pay Period ‘From’ field</span></td> <td width="73.786%"><span style="font-size: medium;">This field displays the date based on the payroll period set in the <strong>Payroll Setup</strong> screen.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="26.214%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Pay Period ‘To’ field</span></td> <td width="73.786%"><span style="font-size: medium;">This field displays the current date.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="26.214%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Employee Name</span></td> <td width="73.786%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the name of the employee.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td><span style="font-size: 16px;">Employee ID</span></td> <td><span style="font-size: 16px;">Displays the ID of the employee.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="26.214%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Phone</span></td> <td width="73.786%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the phone number of the employee.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="26.214%"><span style="font-size: medium;">SSN (Social Security Number)</span></td> <td width="73.786%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the social security number of the employee.</span></td> </tr> <tr> <td width="26.214%"><span style="font-size: medium;">Gross Earnings</span></td> <td width="73.786%"> <span style="font-size: medium;">Displays the total earnings of the employee. </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Earnings can be calculated as follows:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Earnings = (Regular Hours * Regular Rate) + (Overtime Hours * Overtime Rate) + (Double time Hours * Double time Rate)</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Note:</span></p> <ol type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Time sheets created using the Create Multiple Timesheets link cannot be used for earnings calculation (i.e. for generating the gross pay).</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="295"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506299/original/u_idYfjWm_D_13NvCSuUY5LMUa3DBYEx4g?1501083161" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506299/original/u_idYfjWm_D_13NvCSuUY5LMUa3DBYEx4g?1501083161" data-fileid="4041506299" data-uniquekey="1501082577898"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ol type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the Create Timesheet screen, the hours entered for the <strong>individual days </strong>will only be used for earnings calculation.</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="626"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506237/original/b7fLph4nJ9m2bf6nKKslNfAI_LJHQsCvbg?1501083096" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506237/original/b7fLph4nJ9m2bf6nKKslNfAI_LJHQsCvbg?1501083096" data-fileid="4041506237" data-uniquekey="1501082577898"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ol type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Gross pay can be generated only for the <strong>individual days </strong>as shown in the above screen.</span></li></ol> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Weekly, Monthly </strong>and<strong> Yearly</strong> rates are converted to hourly rate while calculating earnings. If you select <strong>Flat Fee</strong> as the Rate, then the earnings calculation will be done based on the entered <strong>Flat Fee</strong> value.</span></li></ul> </td> </tr> </tbody></table> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Viewing Employee Time Sheet Hours</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To view employee details, double-click on an employee record in the <strong>Pay Employees</strong> home page. The system displays the following screen.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506349/original/VTd-VRPQGqI0s9GUrFiHlLbMn2-VTF-CAA?1501083209" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506349/original/VTd-VRPQGqI0s9GUrFiHlLbMn2-VTF-CAA?1501083209" data-fileid="4041506349" data-uniquekey="1501082577898"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen:</span></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can view the list of approved time sheet hours for the <strong>individual days</strong>.</span></li> <li> <span style="font-size: medium;">Double click on any time sheet record to view its details.</span><font color="#4a4a4a" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font> </li> </ul> </div><div><br></div><div><font><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">EMPLOYEE DETAILS</b></font></div><div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In order to view the Profile Data, and HR Data of the employee, highlight the desired employee record from employee home page, and double click to view the details. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying Employee Management pop-up window, as shown below.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The pop-up window has 2 tabs: Profile Data, and HR Data tabs respectively. By default, the Profile Data tab is highlighted.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In Profile Data tab, you can see Candidate Info, and Contact Info tabs respectively.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506616/original/3kBb17R_XpayB2HOeAqj3wMjKUobhhNqxw?1501083640" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506616/original/3kBb17R_XpayB2HOeAqj3wMjKUobhhNqxw?1501083640" data-fileid="4041506616" data-uniquekey="1501082577898"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Candidate Info tab displays following:</span></p> <ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the Candidate Info tab, you can view the details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the candidate</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>‘Update’</strong> link to implement the changes made.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>‘Close’</strong> link to close the pop-up window.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the Contact Info tab to view the details of the candidate’s contact information.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p> <p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506634/original/UD6CwJc8_0jgDMZ1pYPwZ0aOIC_7tZcykw?1501083669" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506634/original/UD6CwJc8_0jgDMZ1pYPwZ0aOIC_7tZcykw?1501083669" data-fileid="4041506634" data-uniquekey="1501082577898"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Contact Info tab displays following:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1. In the Contact Info tab, you can view the contact details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the contacts</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2. Click on the <strong>‘Update’</strong> link to implement the changes made.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3. Click on the <strong>‘Close’</strong> link to close the pop-up window.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">4. Click on the HR Data tab to view the HR details of the candidate.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In HR Data  tab, you can see Compensation, Personal Profile, and Tax Deductions tabs respectively.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" width="535"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506670/original/S1kreox9kKoG3WjbxCV68GU3Vl_USCVjgA?1501083701" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506670/original/S1kreox9kKoG3WjbxCV68GU3Vl_USCVjgA?1501083701" data-fileid="4041506670" data-uniquekey="1501082577898"> </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74); text-align: center;"><b style="font-size: medium;">Compensation Tab pop up window</b></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Compensation tab displays the following:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1. In the Compensation tab, you can view the reimbursement details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the compensation.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2. Click on the <strong>‘Update’</strong> link to implement the changes made.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3. Click on the <strong>‘Close’</strong> link to close the pop-up window.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">4. Click on the Personal Profile tab to view the personal details of the candidate.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" width="516"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506726/original/UxgID26EUU4WFdf9_O_-dmXpwCo0t-fDmQ?1501083741" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506726/original/UxgID26EUU4WFdf9_O_-dmXpwCo0t-fDmQ?1501083741" data-fileid="4041506726" data-uniquekey="1501082577898"> <span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74); text-align: center;"><b style="font-size: medium;">Personal Profile Tab pop up window</b></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Personal Profile tab displays following:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1. In the Personal Profile tab, you can view the personal details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the candidate.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2. Click on the <strong>‘Update’</strong> link to implement the changes made.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3. Click on the <strong>‘Close’</strong> link to close the pop-up window.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">4. Click on the Tax Deductions tab to view the tax details of the candidate.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <table cellspacing="0" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);" width="539"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506758/original/_ZcP485BLziBYbs7G5O1n_kkjFZkIAdOvw?1501083778" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506758/original/_ZcP485BLziBYbs7G5O1n_kkjFZkIAdOvw?1501083778" data-fileid="4041506758" data-uniquekey="1501082577898"> </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74); text-align: center;"><b style="font-size: medium;">Tax Deductions Tab pop up window</b></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Tax Deductions tab displays following:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1. In the Tax Deductions tab, you can view the tax details of the candidate, and you can edit the details of the tax information.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2. Click on the <strong>‘Update’</strong> link to implement the changes made.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3. Click on the <strong>‘Close’</strong> link to close the pop-up window.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p> </div> 266150 1377 4000012433 2017-07-26T11:43:20-04:00 4004241107 9 2 5 1 Accounting - Employees 2015-08-21T04:41:08-04:00 12054499 1 2014-04-29T11:07:56-04:00 2 1 BANKING HOME Banking in Accounting is designed to view your deposits and payments. You can do your transactions through banks. You can add the bank account either in bank section or accounts section. You can create accounts through Accounts section in the Accounting module. Select the Accounting >> Banking link from menu bar, or from the left menu to display the Banking home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the Banking home page. In Banking home page, you can find the list of active chart of bank accounts, which provides the financial details that are related to your corresponding banks. The details of the banks are displayed under the following columns: Name, Account Number, Parent, Type, Location, Department and Balance Total. Under each column, corresponding details are displayed. You can create new bank account using the Create New link available in the Banking home page.  Click on the ‘Add Transactions’ link provided in the strip bar, for making payments through checks.  Double click on the desired bank account, to view the details. CREATE A NEW BANK ACCOUNT You can create a new bank account using the Create New link available in the Banking home page. To create new bank account, do the following: Click on Create New link. The system displays the form to add new bank account. In the above screen, Specify the account number in the Account Number text box. Enter the bank name in the Name text box. This is mandatory. Specify the location, department details in the fields provided. Click on edit list links available beside the Location and Department drop-down lists to add/edit/delete the location and departments. Specify the sub account details if required. Enter the description and notes for the new bank account in the respective fields. Specify the opening balance amount in the text box. Click on the ‘Save’ to save the new bank account type. Click on the ‘Close’ to close the new bank account screen.   Editing Bank Account Select the required account record you wish to edit and click Edit link. The system displays the account record in edit mode. Make the required changes and click Update to save the new changes. Click Close link to close the account screen.   Deleting Bank Account Select the required account record you wish to delete and click Delete link. You are prompted for confirmation. Confirm the deletion in the prompt.   Note: You cannot delete the accounts that are associated with account transactions and also the default accounts. ADD TRANSACTIONS In Banking screen, you can do your payments by clicking on the ‘Add Transactions’ link. Enter all details such as account name, check number and amount to be paid to the selected account and click on the ‘Add Transactions’ link. You can make payments to various parties by selecting the required account using the ‘Add Row‘ link in a single page. You can delete the payment and recalculate the payment details. You can add new bank accounts in banking section as well as in accounts section. Click on the ‘Add Transactions’ link from the Banking home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the Add Transactions screen. The refreshed screen displays the following: Select the bank account from the Bank Account drop-down list. By default current date is displayed in the Transaction Date textbox. Alternatively, you can use the calendar icon to specify the date. Initially the screen has the following links: ‘Add Row’ and ‘Add Transactions’ links respectively. Select the required party from the Payee drop-down list. Select the account from the Account drop-down list. Enter the description in the Memo text box. Enter the checknumber in the Check No. text box. Enter the amount to be paid in the Amount text box. Click on the ‘Add Row’ link to add the row, and make payment to another party, in the add transactions page. One more link ‘Delete Row’ will get added to the strip bar. To delete a row, select the check box near the desired record, and click on the‘Delete’ Row link to delete the row. You can add a new bank account from Bank Account drop down list.  Click on the ‘Add Transactions’ link to make the payment. The add transactions screen refreshes by making the payment. <p><b style="font-size: x-large; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);">BANKING HOME</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Banking in Accounting is designed to view your deposits and payments. You can do your transactions through banks. You can add the bank account either in bank section or accounts section. You can create accounts through Accounts section in the Accounting module.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the Accounting &gt;&gt; Banking link from menu bar, or from the left menu to display the Banking home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the Banking home page.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In Banking home page, you can find the list of active chart of bank accounts, which provides the financial details that are related to your corresponding banks.</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The details of the banks are displayed under the following columns: <strong>Name, Account Number, Parent, Type, Location, Department </strong>and<strong> Balance Total</strong>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Under each column, corresponding details are displayed.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can create new bank account using the <strong>Create New</strong> link available in the Banking home page. </span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>‘Add Transactions’</strong> link provided in the strip bar, for making payments through checks. </span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Double click on the desired bank account, to view the details.</span></li> </ol><p><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><br></b></p><p><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">CREATE A NEW BANK ACCOUNT</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You can create a new bank account using the <strong>Create New</strong> link available in the Banking home page.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To create new bank account, do the following:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>Create New</strong> link. The system displays the form to add new bank account.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506885/original/inufwyt71PNtHdADX-IRk1NbFbVunT17QQ?1501083942" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041506885/original/inufwyt71PNtHdADX-IRk1NbFbVunT17QQ?1501083942" data-fileid="4041506885" data-uniquekey="1501083860638"></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen,</span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the account number in the Account Number text box.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the bank name in the Name text box. This is mandatory.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the location, department details in the fields provided. Click on <strong>edit list</strong> links available beside the <strong>Location</strong> and <strong>Department</strong> drop-down lists to add/edit/delete the location and departments.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the sub account details if required.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the description and notes for the new bank account in the respective fields.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the opening balance amount in the text box.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>‘Save’</strong> to save the new bank account type.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <strong>‘Close’</strong> to close the new bank account screen.</span></li> </ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>Editing Bank Account</strong></span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required account record you wish to edit and click <strong>Edit</strong> link. The system displays the account record in edit mode.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Make the required changes and click <strong>Update</strong> to save the new changes.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click <strong>Close</strong> link to close the account screen.</span></li> </ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><strong>Deleting Bank Account</strong></span></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required account record you wish to delete and click <strong>Delete</strong> link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You are prompted for confirmation. Confirm the deletion in the prompt.</span></li> </ol><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>: You cannot delete the accounts that are associated with account transactions and also the default accounts.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">ADD TRANSACTIONS</b></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">In Banking screen, you can do your payments by clicking on the <strong>‘Add Transactions’ </strong>link. Enter all details such as account name, check number and amount to be paid to the selected account and click on the <strong>‘<strong><strong>Add Transactions</strong></strong></strong><strong><strong>’ </strong>link.</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>You can make payments to various parties by selecting the required account using the ‘<strong>Add Row</strong></strong><strong>‘ link in a single page. You can delete the payment and recalculate the payment details. You can add new bank accounts in banking section as well as in accounts section.</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Click on the ‘<strong>Add Transactions’</strong></strong> link from the Banking home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the <strong>Add Transactions screen.</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong><br></strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span></p><p><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4012595790/original/Add_Transactions.PNG?1429037647" class="inline-image fr-dii fr-draggable" data-id="4012595790" style="cursor: default;"></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><br></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">The refreshed screen displays the following:</b></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the bank account from the Bank Account drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">By default current date is displayed in the Transaction Date textbox. Alternatively, you can use the calendar icon<img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Accounting_UM_files/image009.jpg" alt="" class="fr-dii fr-draggable" style="width: 16px; height: 16px;"> to specify the date.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Initially the screen has the following links: ‘Add Row’ and ‘Add Transactions’ links respectively.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required party from the Payee drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the account from the Account drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the description in the Memo text box.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the checknumber in the Check No. text box.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the amount to be paid in the Amount text box.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘Add Row’ link to add the row, and make payment to another party, in the add transactions page.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">One more link ‘Delete Row’ will get added to the strip bar.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To delete a row, select the check box near the desired record, and click on the‘Delete’ Row link to delete the row.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can add a new bank account from Bank Account drop down list. </span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘Add Transactions’ link to make the payment. The add transactions screen refreshes by making the payment.</span></li> </ol><div><font color="#000000"><strong><br></strong></font></div><div><font color="#000000"><strong><br></strong></font></div> 266150 366 4000012445 2017-07-26T11:48:08-04:00 4004241107 10 2 2 1 Accounting - Banking 2015-08-21T04:41:09-04:00 12054499 1 2014-04-29T11:25:52-04:00 1 0 ASSIGNMENTS HOME PAGE Select the Accounting >> Assignments link from menu bar, or from the left menu to display the Assignments home page. In the Assignments Home Page, you can view the list of all assignments. The Assignments Home Page consists of the following columns: ID-Company, ID-Employee, Type, Job Location, ($) Rate, Start Date, End Date, Assignment ID, Assignment Name, Placed By, Status, Created Date, Created By, Modified Date and Modified By. Each column have their corresponding record details. The Status column is a drop list with the following options: All, Active, Closed, Cancelledand Needs Approval. By default, all the active assignments will be displayed in the Assignments home page. From the Assignments Home Page, you can export the assignment by clicking on the‘Export’ link and can create the new assignments by clicking on the ‘New Assignment’link. Click on Update Status link to update the status of assignments to some other status. You can update the status of multiple assignments at a time. For example, multiple assignments ofActive status can be changed to Closed status at a time using the Update Status link. Note: Only assignments of same status can be updated to some other assignment status. While approving the Needs Approval status assignments, if the job order (assignment) has no start date specified, then the selected start date will be taken as the assignment start date. The status of “Direct” job type assignments will be changed to Closed once the user approves the assignment by clicking the Update Status link. See the Export Assignments and New Assignment topics for more details. ASSIGNMENT GRID The order of the columns on the Assignment grid of has been modified in the Accounting – Assignments listing screen. By default, only assignments with a status of “Active” and “Needs Approval” are listed.   The “Type” column, representing Employee Type (w-2, 1099, CtoC), has been replaced with “Job Type” (Temp/Contract, Direct, etc). The “Rate” column has been renamed to “Pay Rate”. CANDIDATE STATUS & JOB ORDER STATUS UPDATE Users can update the CRM Candidate and Job order statuses when updating the status of an assignment(s) in the Accounting module along with being able to add a note to the same CRM records without even going to the CRM modules. Admin users can enable/disable this feature using the preferences in user management. Once enabled, there are also options to set default values for candidate and job order statuses as well as the note type along with controlling if recruiters can change these default values when updating the status of an assignment. 1) Introduced a new user preference in Admin – User Management under Accounting called “Setup Status Options”.    2) Enabling this preference for a user would display the following link in the Accounting – Assignments module   3) Click on this link to setup the status options for candidates and job orders when updating assignment records. There are 3 sections on this screen. Each section represents the status update being done to the assignment record.   4) List of values for the drop downs in the above screen are the same as in the CRM Candidates for status, CRM Job orders for status. Users can pick one of these statuses to be the default.   NOTE: By default, candidate statuses gets updated as below before this release   a) Updating an active assignment to closed/cancelled changes the candidate status to “Actively Searching” b) Approving a new assignment changes the candidate status to “On Assignment”   5) Enabling this feature by selecting the check boxes to the left will now open the options for users to set the status on candidate and job orders from within the Accounting module.   NOTE: Updating Job order status when changing an assignment status and adding a note to CRM Candidates and Job orders from within the Accounting module is being introduced with this release. A new note type “Assignment Status” is being added by the system.   6) In the above screenshot the check boxes for updating candidate status are selected for all status changes on the assignment records.   As a result, when updating the status of an assignment, existing pop up will display as follows:    NOTE: Option to change the candidate status in the above screenshot is greyed out. This is controlled by the check boxes to the right on the “setup status options” screen.   Enabling “Allow Others to Overwrite” option will open the drop down to users changing the assignment status for selecting a desired value from the drop down for candidate status.   Functionality is similar for updating CRM Job order status and adding a note to both CRM Candidate and Job order records when updating an assignment status from the within the Accounting – Assignments module. APPROVE ASSIGNMENTS You can approve the assignments from the Assignments home page. To approve the assignments, perform the below steps: Select the assignment whose status is Needs Approval and double-click on it. The system displays theAssignments screen as shown below:  To view a full sized copy of the image, please click directly onto the graphic. Enter the required information in the respective fields. Click on the ‘Approve’ link to approve the assignment. The system refreshes by approving and displaying the assignment in the Assignments home page as an Active Assignment.  The same active assignment will also be displayed in the Create Invoices section for the creation of invoices. Note: When the user approves the assignment whose job type is Direct, the system displays the status of that particular assignment as Closed in the Assignments home page. In HRM – Employee Management home page, the status of the employee will be “Terminated”. In CRM – Candidates home page, the candidate Availability Status will be based on the availability date and Candidate Type will be “My Candidate”. Refer to the New Assignment topic, if you want to know more about the fields present in the Approve Assignments screen. Click on the ‘Export’ link to export the assignment. Refer to the Export Assignments topic for more details. Click on the ‘Cancelled’ link to cancel the assignment. You are prompted to enter the reason for cancelling the assignment in the Reason for Cancel textarea as shown below: Enter the reason for cancelling the assignment in the Reason for Cancel textarea and click on the ‘Cancelled’ link again. The screen refreshes by cancelling and displaying the assignment record in the Assignment home page with status as Cancelled. Note:When the user cancels the assignment whose job type is Direct, the status of that particular assignment will be Cancelled in the Assignments home page. If the candidate is placed from CRM – Closing Placements, then the employee record will not be displayed in HRM – Employee Management and the record will be displayed in CRM – Candidates home page with no change in the Availability Status. If the employee is placed from CRM – Closing Placements, then the employee record will not be terminated in HRM – Employee Management and also in CRM – Candidates with no change in the Availability Status. If the candidate is placed from HRM – Hiring Management, then the employee record will not be displayed in HRM – Employee Management. Click on the ‘Close’ link to close the window and return to previous page. EDIT ASSIGNMENT DETAILS You can edit the assignment details by double clicking on the required assignment from the Assignments home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the screen to edit the assignment. Modify the employee assignments details. Click on the ‘Update’ link to save the changes. Click on the ‘Close’ link to close the window and return to the previous page. Click on the ‘Export’ link to export the assignment record to the format specified. Refer to the Export Assignments topic for more details.   Closing an Assignment You can close the assignments whenever required. To close an assignment, do the following: Go to Accounting – Assignments – Open any assignment record by double clicking on it. The system displays the record in edit mode. Now, select the assignment status as Closed from the Assignment Status drop-down list and click Update to save the changes. The system displays the following alert message: You have to select an end date for the assignment. This will be useful for creating and approving the timesheets and also for further invoice creation process. Once the assignment gets closed and the status of the assignment will be displayed asClosed under Status column in the Assignments home page. SEARCH FOR COMPANY Akken Staffing relieves you from entering company details each time. Once a company is added in the application, can be searched through search  link provided besides various fields, and the information can be added in the pop up window, thus relieving you from the tedious task of entering the company details again. Clicking on the search  link provided in these windows, besides various fields, displays the Search for Company pop up window as shown below:   Search for Company Screen The Search for Company window provides two types of search functionality: You can either type the name of the company directly in the Company Name text box and click on the search  link.Result: The Company details will be displayed in a link form, in the Click on company for selectionsection. Click on the reseticon, to clear the entry in the Company Name text box,if you have typed a wrong entry in theCompany Name text box. Else, you can also click on the A to Z alphabets links, displayed below the Company Name field. Result: The Company details, starting with the clicked alphabet, will be displayed in a link form, in the Click on company for selection section. Note: Click on the Other link, if the company name starts with anything else, other than an alphabet. After the Company details are displayed, in the Click on company for selection section, click on the desired company link. Result: The selected company is added in the window. SEARCH FOR CONTACT Akken Staffing relieves you from entering contact details each time. Once a contact is added in the application, can be searched through search  link, provided besides various fields, and the information can be added in the pop up window, thus relieving you from the tedious task of entering the contact details again. Clicking on the search  link provided in these windows, besides various fields, displays the Search for Contact pop up window as shown below:   Contact Search Screen The Search for Contact window provides two types of search functionality: The first type of search functionality provides you with two options for searching the contact: Contact Search by Nameand Contact Search by Company. If you want to search the contact by name, then select the Name radio button in the By field, and type the name of the contact in the given text box and click on the search  icon link. Result: The Contact details will be displayed in a link form, in the ‘Click on Contact for selection’ section. Select the Company radio button in the By field and type the name of the contact company in the given text box and click on the search  icon link, if you wish to search the contact by company. Result: The Contact details along with the company will be displayed in a link form, in the ‘Click on Contact for selection’ section. Click on the reset  icon link, to clear the entry in the given text box, if you have typed a wrong entry. Or else, you can click on the A to Z alphabet links, available below the By field. Result: The Contact details, starting with the clicked alphabet will be displayed in a link form, in the ‘Click on Contact for selection’ section. Note: Click on the ‘Other’ link, if the contact name starts with anything else, other than alphabet. After the Contact details are displayed in the ‘Click on Contact for selection’ section, you can click on the desired contact link. Result: The selected contact is added in the window. HIRING PROCESS SECTION The Hiring Process section allows you to capture hiring requirement details of the assignment candidate. By default, the hiring process section is displayed in expanded state. Specify the hiring requirements by selecting the appropriate checkboxes from the hiring process section. To collapse the hiring process section, click on the close with  sign link available at the top right corner of the hiring process hiring requirements section. Result: The close with sign link changes to open with  sign link and collapses the hiring process section. You can also click on the Title text of the Hiring Process section to expand and collapse the section accordingly. BILLING INFORMATION SECTION The Billing Information section highlights on remuneration details set for the selected job type. By default, the billing information section is displayed in expanded state. Click on the  sign link available at the right corner of the billing information section. Result: The  sign link changes to  sign and displays the billing information section in collapsed state. Selecting the job type from the Job Type field is mandatory for capturing the billing information details from the billing information section. Selecting different job type options from the drop down list of Job Type field displays different fields in the Billing Information section as follows: If you select the ‘Direct’ or ‘Internal Direct’ options from the drop down list of Job Type field, then the below screen is displayed in the Billing Information section. Enter the salary set for the job position in the given text box and specify the period and currency from the respective drop down lists. Enter the placement fee for the job position in the Placement Fee field and specify the period from the corresponding drop down list. The Commissions section contains Add Person drop down list consisting of names of all the persons who are entitled for commission for placing the candidate. After selecting the desired commission agent from the drop down list, click on the add link. Result: The selected commission agent gets added and is displayed below the drop down list. You can add as many commission agents you want, by selecting from the drop down list and clicking on the add link. Specify the commission amount in the text box and whether it is a percentage or flat fee (choose from the drop down list) of which component (select from the second drop down list). Click on the ‘remove’ link situated at the end of each commission agent row to remove any commission agent. You can also select the commission agent for the placed candidate by clicking on the ‘select contact‘ link. Result: The Contact Search pop up window is displayed. See the Search for Contact topic for more details. You can even create a new contact by clicking on the ‘new’ link available beside select contact link. Billing Contact field allows you to select the billing contact for the assignment candidate. Click on the ‘select contact‘ link to select the billing contact. Result: The Contact Search pop up window is displayed. See the Search for Contact topic for more details. You can also click on the ‘new contact‘ link, available beside the ‘select contact‘ link, to create a new billing contact. See the Create New Customer topic to know how to create a new contact. The Billing Address field allows you to capture the billing address details of the assignment candidate. Billing Address field displays the ‘select company‘ link, to select the billing address of the candidate. Click on this ‘select company‘ link. Result: The Company Search pop up window is displayed. See theSearch for Company topic to know how to select a company. You can also click on the ‘new company‘ link, available beside the ‘select company‘ link, to create a new billing address. See the Create New Customer topic to know how to create a new company. Enter the payroll provider ID# information in the Payroll Provider ID# text box. The Workers Compensation Codes drop-down list displays the list of compensation codes created by the user in Accounting – Workers Compensation Codes section. You can create a new compensation code if you don’t find the one you are looking for in the drop-down list by clicking on Add link available beside the Workers Compensation Codes drop-down list. Clicking Add will display the screen for creating the new compensation code. The Payment Terms drop-down list displays the list of payment options that are created by the user using the Manage link available beside the drop down list. Specify the type of time sheet approval by selecting the appropriate radio button from the Timesheet Approval field. The Billing Terms drop-down list displays the list of payment options that are created by the user using the Manage link available beside the drop down list. You can also specify the various service terms in the Service Terms textarea. If you select the Internal Temp/Contract‘ or ‘Temp/Contract’ options from the drop down list of Job Type field, then the below screen is displayed in the Billing Information section. Enter the overtime rate for the job position in the Overtime Pay Rate field and specify the period and currency from the respective drop down lists. If you select the ‘Temp/Contract to Direct‘ options from the drop down list of Job Typefield, then the following screen is displayed in the Billing Information section. Specify whether the Pay Rate is Open or Rate based by selecting the appropriate radio button. If the Pay Rate is rate based, then enter the rate in the Rate text box and specify the period and currency from the respective drop down lists. Specify whether the Bill Rate is open or rate based by selecting the appropriate radio button. If the Bill Rate is rate based, then enter the rate in the Rate text box and specify the period and currency from the respective drop down lists. Click on the ‘Calculate Margin’ link to calculate the margin. Result: The Rates section is displayed as follows: Specify the burden percentage in the Burden text box. Burden is a mandatory field for calculating Margin. Click on the ‘CALCULATE’ link to calculate the margin percentage as well as the dollar amount of the margin. Two fields either from Pay Rate/Bill Rate/Margin should be filled along with Burden. Clicking on the ‘CALCULATE’link will calculate the fourth field i.e. either Pay Rate/Bill Rate/Margin. The Company Min Margin percentage displayed beside the ‘CALCULATE’ link is fetched from Accounting module. Click on the ‘Calculate Markup’ link to calculate the markup. Result: The Rates section is displayed as follows: Click on the ‘CALCULATE’ link to calculate the markup percentage, based on pay rate and bill rate. Also, clicking on the ‘CALCULATE’ link will calculate the Pay Rate/Bill Rate, if either of them is not mentioned based on the markup. Click on the Rates link to mention the pay and bill rates. To collapse the billing information section, click on the  sign link available at the right corner of the billing information section. Result: The  sign link changes to  sign link and collapses the billing information section. You can also click on the Title text of the Billing Information section to expand and collapse the section accordingly. SCHEDULE SECTION The Schedule section allows you to specify the job position start date, position working hours and position time of the job order. By default, the schedule section is displayed in expanded state. Click on the  sign link available at the right corner of the Schedule section. Result: The  sign link changes to  sign link and displays the schedule section in collapsed state. Selecting the job type from the Job Type field is mandatory for capturing the schedule details from the schedule section. Selecting different job type options from the drop down list of Job Type field displays different fields in Schedule section as follows: If you select the ‘Direct’ option from the drop down list of Job Type field, then the below screen is displayed in Schedule section.   Schedule Section Screen Specify the Start Date and Hired Date of the assignment by selecting Month, Day and Year in their respective fields from the Start Date and Hired Date drop down list respectively. You can also click on the calendar icon available beside the Start Date, Hired Date drop down list to specify the dates. If you select the ‘Internal Direct‘ option from the drop down list of Job Type field, then the below screen is displayed in the Schedule section.   Schedule Section Screen 1 Specify the Start Date, End Date and Hired Date of the assignment by selecting Month, Day and Year in their respective fields from the Start Date, End Date and Hired Date drop down list respectively. Specify the position working hours as Full time/Part time by selecting the required option from the Hours field. If you select ‘Full Time‘ option from the drop down list of Hours field, then a time schedule of 9.00am to 5.00pm will be displayed by default for the five days of the week from Monday to Friday. If you select ‘Part Time‘ option from the drop down list of Hours field, the daily time schedule for the days of the week will not be displayed by default. You can also modify and specify the position working time for respective days of the week, by selecting from the respective drop down lists available. You can also enter the reason for ending the assignment in the Reason text box. Click on the   calendar icon at the bottom row, to specify a date. Automatically the day will be selected in the day drop down list. Specify the working time from the respective drop down lists. Click on the ‘Add Row‘ link to add additional rows for the selected days of the week. To delete a row, you can check the corresponding check boxes situated at the end of each day row, and click on the ‘delete selected’ link. Result: The Schedule section refreshes by deleting the checked day rows. If you select the ‘Internal Temp/Contract‘ or ‘Temp/Contract‘ options from the drop-down list of Job Type field, then the following screen is displayed in the Schedule section.   Schedule Section Screen 2 Specify the Expected End Date of the position opening by selecting Month, Day and Year in their respective fields from the Expected End Date drop down list. You can also click on the  calendar icon available beside the expected end date drop down list to specify the expected end date. If you select the ‘Temp/Contract to Direct‘ option from the drop-down list of Job Typefield, then the following screen is displayed in the Schedule section.   Schedule Section Screen 3 To collapse the schedule section, click on the  sign link available at the right corner of the schedule section. Result: The  sign link changes to  sign link and collapses the schedule section. You can also click on the Title text of the Schedule section to expand and collapse the section accordingly. EXPORT ASSIGNMENTS You can export the assignment record by clicking on the ‘Export’ link available on the Assignment home page. To export an assignment record, select the required assignment record and click on the ‘Export’ link. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the export assignments screen as shown below:   Export Assignments Screen In the above screen, the Assignment section contains two radio button options: Export without Employee HR Information and Export with Employee HR Information. Select the “Export without Employee HR Information” radio button option and click on the Save link, if you want to export the assignment information without employee HR information. Select the “Export with Employee HR Information” radio button option and click on theSave link, if you want to export the assignment information along with the employee HR information. You can also select the report type from the Select report type drop-down list. Click on the ‘Save’ link to go ahead with the export process. Result: The screen refreshes by displaying the edit details screen based on the option selected in the Export Assignment screen. If you select the “Export without Employee HR Information” radio button option and click on the ‘Save’ link, then the following screen will be displayed: If you select the “Export with Employee HR Information” radio button option and click on the ‘Save’ link, then the following screen will be displayed as shown below: Select the required check box options from the above screens and click on the ‘Export’link. Result: The screen refreshes by exporting the assignment record in the format specified by you (PDF or CSV). Note: If you select the report type as CSV while exporting the assignment record, then the assignment record will be exported in CSV format as shown below: Click on the Open button to open assignment record. Click on the Save button to save the assignment record to a desired location. Click on the Cancel button to cancel and return back to Export Assignments screen <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: x-large;">ASSIGNMENTS HOME PAGE</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the Accounting &gt;&gt; Assignments link from menu bar, or from the left menu to display the Assignments home page.</span></p> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the Assignments Home Page, you can view the list of all assignments.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Assignments Home Page consists of the following columns: <i>ID-</i>Company, ID-Employee, Type, Job Location, ($) Rate, Start Date, End Date, Assignment ID, Assignment Name, Placed By, Status, Created Date, Created By, Modified Date and Modified By. Each column have their corresponding record details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Status column is a drop list with the following options: <i>All, Active, Closed, Cancelled</i>and <i>Needs Approval</i>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">By default, all the active assignments will be displayed in the Assignments home page.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">From the Assignments Home Page, you can export the assignment by clicking on the<b>‘Export’ </b>link and can create the new assignments by clicking on the <b>‘New Assignment’</b>link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <b>Update Status</b> link to update the status of assignments to some other status. You can update the status of multiple assignments at a time. For example, multiple assignments of<b>Active</b> status can be changed to <b>Closed</b> status at a time using the <b>Update Status</b> link.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Note:</b></p> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Only assignments of same status can be updated to some other assignment status.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">While approving the Needs Approval status assignments, if the job order (assignment) has no start date specified, then the selected start date will be taken as the assignment start date.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The status of <b>“Direct”</b> job type assignments will be changed to <b>Closed</b> once the user approves the assignment by clicking the<b> Update Status</b> link.</span></li> </ul> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">See the <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Export_Assignments.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Export Assignments</a> and <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/New_Assignments.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">New Assignment</a> topics for more details.</span></li></ol> <h1 style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(0, 173, 237); font-weight: bold;"><span style="color: navy; font-size: medium;"><br></span></h1> <h1 style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-weight: bold;"><span style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">ASSIGNMENT GRID</span></h1> <p></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The order of the columns on the Assignment grid of has been modified in the Accounting – Assignments listing screen.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">By default, only assignments with a status of “Active” and “Needs Approval” are listed.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver1.akken.com/BSOS/Help/New%20Features_UM/CRM,_HRM_and_Assignments_Enhancements_files/image025.jpg" alt="ScreenShot015" width="604" height="166" style="cursor: default;"></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The “Type” column, representing Employee Type (w-2, 1099, CtoC), has been replaced with “Job Type” (Temp/Contract, Direct, etc).</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The “Rate” column has been renamed to “Pay Rate”.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"> </p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver1.akken.com/BSOS/Help/New%20Features_UM/CRM,_HRM_and_Assignments_Enhancements_files/image027.jpg" alt="ScreenShot002" width="608" height="65" style="cursor: default;"></b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">CANDIDATE STATUS &amp; JOB ORDER STATUS UPDATE</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Users can update the CRM Candidate and Job order statuses when updating the status of an assignment(s) in the Accounting module along with being able to add a note to the same CRM records without even going to the CRM modules.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"></p> <p><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4012634263/original/Assignment_Status1.PNG?1429119724" class="inline-image" data-id="4012634263" style="cursor: default;"></p> <br> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Admin users can enable/disable this feature using the preferences in user management. Once enabled, there are also options to set default values for candidate and job order statuses as well as the note type along with controlling if recruiters can change these default values when updating the status of an assignment.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"></p> <p><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4012634331/original/User_Mgmt_-_Accounting.PNG?1429119879" class="inline-image" data-id="4012634331" style="cursor: default;"></p> <br> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1) Introduced a new user preference in Admin – User Management under Accounting called “Setup Status Options”.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><span> </span><span> </span></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">2) Enabling this preference for a user would display the following link in the</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Accounting – Assignments module</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">3) Click on this link to setup the status options for candidates and job orders when updating assignment records. There are 3 sections on this screen. Each section represents the status update being done to the assignment record.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">4) List of values for the drop downs in the above screen are the same as in the</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">CRM Candidates for status, CRM Job orders for status. Users can pick one of</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">these statuses to be the default.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><span> </span><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><b>NOTE: </b>By default, candidate statuses gets updated as below before this release</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">a) Updating an active assignment to closed/cancelled changes the candidate status to “Actively Searching”</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">b) Approving a new assignment changes the candidate status to “On Assignment”</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">5) Enabling this feature by selecting the check boxes to the left will now open the options for users to set the status on candidate and job orders from within the Accounting module.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><b>NOTE: </b>Updating Job order status when changing an assignment status and adding a note to CRM Candidates and Job orders from within the Accounting module is being introduced with this release. A new note type “Assignment Status” is being added by the system.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">6) In the above screenshot the check boxes for updating candidate status are selected for all status changes on the assignment records.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">As a <span>result, when updating the status of an assignment, existing pop up will display as follows:</span></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> <span> </span></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><b>NOTE: </b>Option to change the candidate status in the above screenshot is greyed out. This is controlled by the check boxes to the right on the “setup status options” screen.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><span> </span><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Enabling “Allow Others to Overwrite” option will open the drop down to users changing the assignment status for selecting a desired value from the drop down for candidate status.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="line-height: 1.3; font-size: medium;">Functionality is similar for updating CRM Job order status and adding a note to both CRM Candidate and Job order records when updating an assignment status from the within the Accounting – Assignments module.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="line-height: 1.3; font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="line-height: 1.3; color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;"><b>APPROVE ASSIGNMENTS</b></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You can approve the assignments from the Assignments home page.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To approve the assignments, perform the below steps:</span></p> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the assignment whose status is <b>Needs Approval</b> and double-click on it. The system displays the<b>Assignments</b> screen as shown below:</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> To view a full sized copy of the image, please click directly onto the graphic.</span></p> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the required information in the respective fields.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>Approve</b>’ link to approve the assignment. The system refreshes by approving and displaying the assignment in the <b>Assignments</b> home page as an <b>Active Assignment</b>.  The same active assignment will also be displayed in the <b>Create Invoices</b> section for the creation of invoices.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><b>Note:</b> When the user approves the assignment whose job type is <b>Direct</b>, the system displays the status of that particular assignment as <b>Closed</b> in the <b>Assignments</b> home page.</span></p> <ul type="circle" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In <b>HRM – Employee Management</b> home page, the status of the employee will be “<b>Terminated”</b>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In <b>CRM – Candidates</b> home page, the candidate Availability Status will be based on the availability date and Candidate Type will be <b>“My Candidate”</b>.</span></li> </ul> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Refer to the <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/New_Assignments.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">New Assignment</a> topic, if you want to know more about the fields present in the Approve Assignments screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>Export’</b> link to export the assignment. Refer to the <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Export_Assignments.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Export Assignments</a> topic for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>Cancelled’</b> link to cancel the assignment. You are prompted to enter the reason for cancelling the assignment in the <i>Reason for Cancel</i> textarea as shown below:</span></li> </ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="329" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Cancel_Assignment_Screen.gif" alt="" width="600px" height="1383px" style="cursor: default;"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the reason for cancelling the assignment in the <i>Reason for Cancel</i> textarea and click on the ‘<b>Cancelled’</b> link again. The screen refreshes by cancelling and displaying the assignment record in the Assignment home page with status as <b>Cancelled</b>.</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><b>Note</b>:When the user cancels the assignment whose job type is <b>Direct</b>, the status of that particular assignment will be <b>Cancelled</b> in the <b>Assignments</b> home page.</span></p> <ol type="circle" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li> <ul type="circle" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If the candidate is placed from <b>CRM – Closing Placements</b>, then the employee record will not be displayed in <b>HRM – Employee Management</b> and the record will be displayed in <b>CRM – Candidates</b> home page with no change in the <b>Availability Status</b>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If the employee is placed from <b>CRM – Closing Placements</b>, then the employee record will not be terminated in <b>HRM – Employee Management</b> and also in <b>CRM – Candidates</b> with no change in the <b>Availability Status</b>.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If the candidate is placed from <b>HRM – Hiring Management</b>, then the employee record will not be displayed in <b>HRM – Employee Management.</b> </span></li> </ul> </li></ol> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>Close</b>’ link to close the window and return to previous page.</span></li></ol> <div><font color="#000000" face="Times New Roman" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div> <div><font face="Times New Roman"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">EDIT ASSIGNMENT DETAILS</b></font></div> <div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You can edit the assignment details by double clicking on the required assignment from the Assignments home page. The screen refreshes by displaying the screen to edit the assignment.</span></p> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Modify the employee assignments details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <b>‘Update’</b> link to save the changes.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <b>‘Close’ link</b><b> </b>to close the window and return to the previous page.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <b>‘Export’</b> link to export the assignment record to the format specified. Refer to the <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Export_Assignments.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Export Assignments</a> topic for more details.</span></li> </ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Closing an Assignment</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You can close the assignments whenever required.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To close an assignment, do the following:</span></p> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Go to <b>Accounting – Assignments</b> – Open any assignment record by double clicking on it. The system displays the record in edit mode.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Now, select the assignment status as <b>Closed</b> from the <b>Assignment Status</b> drop-down list and click <b>Update</b> to save the changes. The system displays the following alert message:</span></li> </ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="415" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Close_an_Assignment.jpg" alt="" width="505px" height="118px" style="cursor: default;"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You have to select an end date for the assignment. This will be useful for creating and approving the timesheets and also for further invoice creation process.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Once the assignment gets closed and the status of the assignment will be displayed as<b>Closed</b> under <b>Status</b> column in the <b>Assignments</b> home page.</span></li> </ol> <div><font color="#000000" face="Times New Roman" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div> </div> <div><font face="Times New Roman"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">SEARCH FOR COMPANY</b></font></div> <div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><b>Akken Staffing</b> relieves you from entering company details each time. Once a company is added in the application, can be searched through search <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/search_icon_2.jpg" alt="" width="18px" height="16px" style="cursor: default;"> link provided besides various fields, and the information can be added in the pop up window, thus relieving you from the tedious task of entering the company details again.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Clicking on the search <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/search_icon_2.jpg" alt="" width="18px" height="16px"> link provided in these windows, besides various fields, displays the Search for Company pop up window as shown below:</span></p> <table cellspacing="0" width="58.426%" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/search_for_company.jpg" alt="" width="450px" height="256px" style="cursor: default;"> </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Search for Company Screen</b></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Search for Company window provides two types of search functionality:</span></p> <ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can either type the name of the company directly in the <b>Company Name</b> text box and click on the search <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/search_icon.jpg" alt="" width="25px" height="23px"> link.<i>Result:</i> The Company details will be displayed in a link form, in the <i>Click on company for selection</i>section. Click on the <b>reset<img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/reset_icon.jpg" alt="" width="18px" height="17px"></b>icon, to clear the entry in the <i>Company Name</i> text box,if you have typed a wrong entry in the<i>Company Name</i> text box.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Else, you can also click on the <b>A</b> to <b>Z</b> alphabets links, displayed below the <i>Company Name</i> field. <i>Result:</i> The Company details, starting with the clicked alphabet, will be displayed in a link form, in the <i>Click on company for selection</i> section. <i><b>Note:</b></i> Click on the <b>Other</b> link, if the company name starts with anything else, other than an alphabet.</span></li> </ul> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">After the Company details are displayed, in the <i>Click on company for selection</i> section, click on the desired company link. <i>Result:</i> The selected company is added in the window.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">SEARCH FOR CONTACT</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><b>Akken Staffing</b> relieves you from entering contact details each time. Once a contact is added in the application, can be searched through <b>search</b> <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/search_icon_2.jpg" alt="" width="18px" height="16px"> link, provided besides various fields, and the information can be added in the pop up window, thus relieving you from the tedious task of entering the contact details again.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Clicking on the <b>search <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/search_icon_2.jpg" alt="" width="18px" height="16px"> </b>link provided in these windows, besides various fields, displays the Search for Contact pop up window as shown below:</span></p> <table cellspacing="0" width="475" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/search_for_contact.jpg" alt="" width="450px" height="255px" style="cursor: default;"> </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Contact Search Screen</span></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Search for Contact window provides two types of search functionality:</span></p> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">The first type of search functionality provides you with two options for searching the contact: <i>Contact Search by Name</i>and <i>Contact Search by Company</i>.</span></li></ol> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you want to search the contact by name, then select the <i>Name</i> radio button in the <i>By</i> field, and type the name of the contact in the given text box and click on the <b>search <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/search_icon.jpg" alt="" width="25px" height="26px"></b> icon link. <i>Result</i>: The Contact details will be displayed in a link form, in the ‘<i>Click on Contact for selection’</i> section.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the <i>Company</i> radio button in the <i>By</i> field and type the name of the contact company in the given text box and click on the <b>search <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/search_icon.jpg" alt="" width="25px" height="26px"></b> icon link, if you wish to search the contact by company. <i>Result</i>: The Contact details along with the company will be displayed in a link form, in the ‘<i>Click on Contact for selection</i>’ section.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <b>reset <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/reset_icon.jpg" alt="" width="18px" height="17px"> </b>icon link, to clear the entry in the given text box, if you have typed a wrong entry.</span></li> </ul> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Or else, you can click on the <b>A</b> to <b>Z</b> alphabet links, available below the <i>By</i> field. <i>Result</i>: The Contact details, starting with the clicked alphabet will be displayed in a link form, in the ‘<i>Click on Contact for selection</i>’ section.</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><b>Note</b>: Click on the <b>‘Other’</b> link, if the contact name starts with anything else, other than alphabet.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">After the Contact details are displayed in the ‘<i>Click on Contact for selection</i>’ section, you can click on the desired contact link. <i>Result</i>: The selected contact is added in the window.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">HIRING PROCESS SECTION</b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Hiring Process section allows you to capture hiring requirement details of the assignment candidate.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">By default, the hiring process section is displayed in expanded state.</span></p> <div><br></div> <p><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4012639334/original/Assignments_-_Hiring_Process.PNG?1429131493" class="inline-image" data-id="4012639334" style="cursor: default;"></p> <br> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the hiring requirements by selecting the appropriate checkboxes from the hiring process section.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To collapse the hiring process section, click on the <b>close</b> with <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link available at the top right corner of the hiring process hiring requirements section. <i>Result</i>: The <b>close</b> with <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px">sign link changes to <b>open</b> with <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/plus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link and collapses the hiring process section.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also click on the Title text of the Hiring Process section to expand and collapse the section accordingly.</span></li> </ol> <div><font color="#000000" face="Times New Roman" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div> <div><font face="Times New Roman"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">BILLING INFORMATION SECTION</b></font></div> <div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Billing Information section highlights on remuneration details set for the selected job type.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">By default, the billing information section is displayed in expanded state.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link available at the right corner of the billing information section. <i>Result</i>: The <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link changes to <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/plus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px" style="cursor: default;"> sign and displays the billing information section in collapsed state.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the job type from the Job Type field is mandatory for capturing the billing information details from the billing information section.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting different job type options from the drop down list of <i>Job Type</i> field displays different fields in the Billing Information section as follows:</span></p> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select the <b>‘Direct’</b> or ‘<b>Internal Direct’ </b>options from the drop down list of <i>Job Type </i>field, then the below screen is displayed in the Billing Information section.</span></li></ol> <div><br></div> <p><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4012639402/original/Assignments_-_Direct_-_Billing_Info.PNG?1429131629" class="inline-image" data-id="4012639402" style="cursor: default;"></p> <br> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the salary set for the job position in the given text box and specify the period and currency from the respective drop down lists.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the placement fee for the job position in the Placement Fee field and specify the period from the corresponding drop down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Commissions section contains <i>Add Person</i> drop down list consisting of names of all the persons who are entitled for commission for placing the candidate.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">After selecting the desired commission agent from the drop down list, click on the <b>add</b> link. <i>Result</i>: The selected commission agent gets added and is displayed below the drop down list. You can add as many commission agents you want, by selecting from the drop down list and clicking on the add link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the commission amount in the text box and whether it is a percentage or flat fee (choose from the drop down list) of which component (select from the second drop down list).</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <b>‘remove’</b> link situated at the end of each commission agent row to remove any commission agent.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also select the commission agent for the placed candidate by clicking on the ‘<b>select contact</b>‘ link. <i>Result</i>: The Contact Search pop up window is displayed. See the <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Search_for_Contact.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Search for Contact</a> topic for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can even create a new contact by clicking on the <b>‘new’</b> link available beside <b>select contact</b> link.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Billing Contact field allows you to select the billing contact for the assignment candidate. Click on the ‘<b>select contact</b>‘ link to select the billing contact. <i>Result</i>: The Contact Search pop up window is displayed. See the <a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Search_for_Contact.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Search for Contact</a> topic for more details.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also click on the ‘<b>new contact</b>‘ link, available beside the ‘<b>select contact</b>‘ link, to create a new billing contact. See the <b><a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Create_New_Customer.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Create New Customer</a></b> topic to know how to create a new contact.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Billing Address field allows you to capture the billing address details of the assignment candidate.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Billing Address field displays the ‘<b>select company</b>‘ link, to select the billing address of the candidate.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on this ‘<b>select company</b>‘ link. <i>Result</i>: The Company Search pop up window is displayed. See the<a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Search_for_Company.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Search for Company</a> topic to know how to select a company.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also click on the ‘<b>new company</b>‘ link, available beside the ‘<b>select company</b>‘ link, to create a new billing address. See the <b><a href="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Create_New_Customer.htm" style="color: rgb(0, 173, 237);">Create New Customer</a></b> topic to know how to create a new company.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the payroll provider ID# information in the <i>Payroll Provider ID#</i> text box.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The <b>Workers Compensation Codes</b> drop-down list displays the list of compensation codes created by the user in Accounting – Workers Compensation Codes section. You can create a new compensation code if you don’t find the one you are looking for in the drop-down list by clicking on <b>Add</b> link available beside the <b>Workers Compensation Codes</b> drop-down list. Clicking <b>Add</b> will display the screen for creating the new compensation code.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Payment Terms drop-down list displays the list of payment options that are created by the user using the Manage link available beside the drop down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the type of time sheet approval by selecting the appropriate radio button from the <i>Timesheet Approval</i> field.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Billing Terms drop-down list displays the list of payment options that are created by the user using the Manage link available beside the drop down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also specify the various service terms in the <i>Service Terms</i> textarea.</span></li> </ul> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select the <b>Internal Temp/Contract</b>‘ or ‘<b>Temp/Contract’</b> options from the drop down list of <i>Job Type</i> field, then the below screen is displayed in the Billing Information section.</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="532" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Assignments-BI2.gif" alt="" width="650px" height="632px" style="cursor: default;"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the overtime rate for the job position in the <i>Overtime Pay Rate</i> field and specify the period and currency from the respective drop down lists.</span></li></ul> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select the ‘<b>Temp/Contract to Direct</b>‘ options from the drop down list of <i>Job Type</i>field, then the following screen is displayed in the Billing Information section.</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="533" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Assignments-BI3.gif" alt="" width="650px" height="655px" style="cursor: default;"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify whether the Pay Rate is Open or Rate based by selecting the appropriate radio button.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If the Pay Rate is rate based, then enter the rate in the <i>Rate</i> text box and specify the period and currency from the respective drop down lists.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify whether the Bill Rate is open or rate based by selecting the appropriate radio button.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If the Bill Rate is rate based, then enter the rate in the <i>Rate</i> text box and specify the period and currency from the respective drop down lists.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>Calculate Margin’</b> link to calculate the margin. <i>Result</i>: The Rates section is displayed as follows:</span></li> </ul> <table cellspacing="0" width="359" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Calculate_Margin.jpg" alt="" width="377px" height="157px" style="cursor: default;"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the burden percentage in the Burden text box. Burden is a mandatory field for calculating Margin.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>CALCULATE’</b> link to calculate the margin percentage as well as the dollar amount of the margin.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Two fields either from Pay Rate/Bill Rate/Margin should be filled along with Burden. Clicking on the ‘<b>CALCULATE’</b>link will calculate the fourth field i.e. either Pay Rate/Bill Rate/Margin.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Company Min Margin percentage displayed beside the ‘<b>CALCULATE’</b> link is fetched from Accounting module.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>Calculate Markup’</b> link to calculate the markup. <i>Result</i>: The Rates section is displayed as follows:</span></li> </ul> <table cellspacing="0" width="302" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%" class="current"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Calculate_Markup.jpg" alt="" width="385px" height="139px" style="cursor: default;"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>CALCULATE’</b> link to calculate the markup percentage, based on pay rate and bill rate.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Also, clicking on the ‘<b>CALCULATE’</b> link will calculate the Pay Rate/Bill Rate, if either of them is not mentioned based on the markup.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <b>Rates</b> link to mention the pay and bill rates.</span></li> </ul> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To collapse the billing information section, click on the <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link available at the right corner of the billing information section. <i>Result</i>: The <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link changes to <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/plus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link and collapses the billing information section.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also click on the Title text of the Billing Information section to expand and collapse the section accordingly.</span></li> </ol> <div><font color="#000000" face="Times New Roman" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div> </div> <div><font face="Times New Roman"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">SCHEDULE SECTION</b></font></div> <div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Schedule section allows you to specify the job position start date, position working hours and position time of the job order.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">By default, the schedule section is displayed in expanded state.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px" style="cursor: default;"> sign link available at the right corner of the <i>Schedule</i> section. <i>Result</i>: The <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px" style="cursor: default;"> sign link changes to <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/plus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link and displays the schedule section in collapsed state.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting the job type from the Job Type field is mandatory for capturing the schedule details from the schedule section.</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Selecting different job type options from the drop down list of Job Type field displays different fields in Schedule section as follows:</span></p> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select the <b>‘Direct’</b> option from the drop down list of Job Type field, then the below screen is displayed in Schedule section.</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="625" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Schedule1.gif" alt="" width="626" height="89" style="cursor: default;"> </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74); text-align: center;"><b style="font-size: medium;">Schedule Section Screen</b></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the Start Date and Hired Date of the assignment by selecting Month, Day and Year in their respective fields from the Start Date and Hired Date drop down list respectively.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also click on the calendar icon available beside the Start Date, Hired Date drop down list to specify the dates.</span></li> </ul> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select the ‘<b>Internal Direct</b>‘ option from the drop down list of <i>Job Type</i> field, then the below screen is displayed in the Schedule section.</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="456" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Schedule2.gif" alt="" width="626" height="321" style="cursor: default;"> </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74); text-align: center;"><b style="font-size: medium;">Schedule Section Screen 1</b></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the Start Date, End Date and Hired Date of the assignment by selecting Month, Day and Year in their respective fields from the Start Date, End Date and Hired Date drop down list respectively.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the position working hours as Full time/Part time by selecting the required option from the Hours field.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select ‘<b>Full Time</b>‘ option from the drop down list of <i>Hours</i> field, then a time schedule of 9.00am to 5.00pm will be displayed by default for the five days of the week from Monday to Friday.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select ‘<b>Part Time</b>‘ option from the drop down list of <i>Hours</i> field, the daily time schedule for the days of the week will not be displayed by default.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also modify and specify the position working time for respective days of the week, by selecting from the respective drop down lists available.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also enter the reason for ending the assignment in the <i>Reason</i> text box.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the  <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/calendar_icon.jpg" alt="" width="18px" height="16px"> calendar icon at the bottom row, to specify a date. Automatically the day will be selected in the day drop down list. Specify the working time from the respective drop down lists.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>Add Row</b>‘ link to add additional rows for the selected days of the week.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To delete a row, you can check the corresponding check boxes situated at the end of each day row, and click on the ‘<b>delete selected’</b> link. <i>Result</i>: The Schedule section refreshes by deleting the checked day rows.</span></li> </ul> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select the ‘<b>Internal Temp/Contract</b>‘ or ‘<b>Temp/Contract</b>‘ options from the drop-down list of <i>Job Type</i> field, then the following screen is displayed in the Schedule section.</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="524" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Schedule3.gif" alt="" width="700px" height="343px" style="cursor: default;"> </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Schedule Section Screen 2</b></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the Expected End Date of the position opening by selecting Month, Day and Year in their respective fields from the Expected End Date drop down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also click on the <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/calendar_icon.jpg" alt="" width="18px" height="16px"> calendar icon available beside the expected end date drop down list to specify the expected end date.</span></li> </ul> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select the ‘<b>Temp/Contract to Direct</b>‘ option from the drop-down list of <i>Job Type</i>field, then the following screen is displayed in the Schedule section.</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="534" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Schedule4.gif" alt="" width="700px" height="366px" style="cursor: default;"> </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;">Schedule Section Screen 3</b></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To collapse the schedule section, click on the <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link available at the right corner of the schedule section. <i>Result</i>: The <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/minus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link changes to <img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/plus_sign.jpg" alt="" width="20px" height="15px"> sign link and collapses the schedule section.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also click on the Title text of the Schedule section to expand and collapse the section accordingly.</span></li> </ol> <div><font color="#000000" face="Times New Roman" style="font-size: medium;"><br></font></div> </div> <div><font face="Times New Roman"><b style="color: rgb(79, 129, 189); font-size: medium;">EXPORT ASSIGNMENTS</b></font></div> <div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You can export the assignment record by clicking on the ‘<b>Export’</b> link available on the Assignment home page.</span></p> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">To export an assignment record, select the required assignment record and click on the ‘<b>Export’</b> link. <i>Result:</i> The screen refreshes by displaying the export assignments screen as shown below:</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="504" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"> <span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Export_Assignment_Option_Screen.gif" alt="" width="600px" height="156px" style="cursor: default;"> </span><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Export Assignments Screen</span></p> </td></tr></tbody></table> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen, the Assignment section contains two radio button options: <i>Export without Employee HR Information</i> and <i>Export with Employee HR Information.</i> </span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the “<b>Export without Employee HR Information</b>” radio button option and click on the <b>Save</b> link, if you want to export the assignment information without employee HR information.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the “<b>Export with Employee HR Information”</b> radio button option and click on the<b>Save</b> link, if you want to export the assignment information along with the employee HR information.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can also select the report type from the <i>Select report type</i> drop-down list.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the ‘<b>Save’</b> link to go ahead with the export process. <i>Result</i>: The screen refreshes by displaying the edit details screen based on the option selected in the Export Assignment screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select the “<b>Export without Employee HR Information</b>” radio button option and click on the ‘<b>Save’</b> link, then the following screen will be displayed:</span></li> </ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="525" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Edit_Details_Screen1.gif" alt="" width="769px" height="733px" style="cursor: default;"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">If you select the “<b>Export with Employee HR Information”</b> radio button option and click on the ‘<b>Save’</b> link, then the following screen will be displayed as shown below:</span></li></ol> <table cellspacing="0" width="473" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman'; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 255);"><tbody><tr><td width="100%"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/Edit_Details_Screen2.gif" alt="" width="750px" height="1183px" style="cursor: default;"></span></td></tr></tbody></table> <ol type="1" style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Select the required check box options from the above screens and click on the ‘<b>Export’</b>link. <i>Result</i>: The screen refreshes by exporting the assignment record in the format specified by you (PDF or CSV).</span></li></ol> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/image2.jpg" alt="" width="404px" height="266px" style="cursor: default;"></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><b style="font-size: medium;"><br></b></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><b>Note</b>: If you select the report type as CSV while exporting the assignment record, then the assignment record will be exported in CSV format as shown below:</span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><br></span></p> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><img src="https://appserver3.akken.com/BSOS/Help/Accounting_UM/image3.jpg" alt="" width="404px" height="266px" style="cursor: default;"></span></p> <ul type="disc" style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <b>Open</b> button to open assignment record.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <b>Save</b> button to save the assignment record to a desired location.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on the <b>Cancel</b> button to cancel and return back to Export Assignments screen</span></li> </ul> </div> </div> <p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 12px; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: 13px; line-height: 1.3;"><br></span></p> 266150 832 4000012448 2015-04-15T17:01:28-04:00 11 2 1 0 Accounting - Assignments 2015-08-21T04:41:09-04:00 12054499 1 2014-04-29T11:27:47-04:00 0 0 WORKERS COMPENSATION CODES The Workers Compensation Codes home page displays the list of compensation codes that are created by the user. The details of the compensation codes are displayed under the following columns: Code, Title, Created Date, Created By, Modified Date and Modified By. You will find two links in the Workers Compensation Codes home page: Create New and Import.   I. Create New Using the Create New link, you can create a new workers compensation code. To create new compensation code, do the following: 1. Click on Create New link available in the Workers Compensation home page. The system displays the screen to add new workers compensation code. In the above screen, Enter the Code, Title and Description for the compensation code in the fields provided. The Rates field contains the links like add new and remove. Clicking add new link will display the Effective Start Date and End Date fields along with the Amountfield and tax type drop list (Before Tax/After Tax). To remove the rate record for compensation, select and click on remove link available in the Add Workers Compensation Code screen. You can create multiple rate records for single compensation code. Specify the start date and end date along with specifying the amount for the discount to be created and finally click on Save to save the changes. The system refreshes by creating a new compensation code and displaying it in the Workers Compensation home page. To edit workers compensation code, double click on the required compensation record in the Workers Compensation Codes home page. The system displays the record in edit mode. Make the required changes and click on Update to save the new changes.   II. Import Using the Import link, you can import the workers compensation codes from other application into AkkenCloud. To import the compensation codes, do the following: Click on Import link available in the Workers Compensation Codes home page. The system displays the Import screen: Specify the file format and select the required file you want to import from your local drive. Once you have selected the required file by clicking on Browse button, click on Import link. Note: Make sure that you upload the .CSV file only. The system displays the Field Mapping screen. Map the required fields in the mapping screen and finally click on Continue. The system now displays the Matching Criteria screen. In the Matching Criteria screen, click Continue link. The system refreshes by importing the selected file. <h1 style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; font-size: 17px; color: rgb(0, 173, 237); font-weight: bold;">WORKERS COMPENSATION CODES</h1><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The Workers Compensation Codes home page displays the list of compensation codes that are created by the user.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">The details of the compensation codes are displayed under the following columns: <strong>Code, Title, Created Date, Created By, Modified Date </strong>and<strong> Modified By.</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">You will find two links in the Workers Compensation Codes home page: <strong>Create New </strong>and<strong> Import.</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041507037/original/S66AjaZvxmNROVojRfaS2TAKjtkPy8oASw?1501084150" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041507037/original/S66AjaZvxmNROVojRfaS2TAKjtkPy8oASw?1501084150" data-fileid="4041507037" data-uniquekey="1501084148023"></strong></span><br></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="font-size: medium; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);"><strong>I. Create New</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Using the Create New link, you can create a new workers compensation code.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To create new compensation code, do the following:</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">1. Click on <strong>Create New</strong> link available in the <strong>Workers Compensation</strong> home page. The system displays the screen to add new workers compensation code.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"></span><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041507066/original/1qpBCRaTSoK3UBC5FMawAowmAPEP_hI87w?1501084183" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041507066/original/1qpBCRaTSoK3UBC5FMawAowmAPEP_hI87w?1501084183" data-fileid="4041507066" data-uniquekey="1501084148023"></p><ol style="color: rgb(0, 0, 0); font-family: 'Times New Roman';" type="1"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">In the above screen,</span></li></ol><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Enter the Code, Title and Description for the compensation code in the fields provided.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">The Rates field contains the links like add new and remove.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Clicking <strong>add new</strong> link will display the <strong>Effective Start Date</strong> and <strong>End Date</strong> fields along with the <strong>Amount</strong>field and tax type drop list (Before Tax/After Tax).</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To remove the rate record for compensation, select and click on remove link available in the <strong>Add Workers Compensation Code</strong> screen.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">You can create multiple rate records for single compensation code.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the start date and end date along with specifying the amount for the discount to be created and finally click on <strong>Save</strong> to save the changes. The system refreshes by creating a new compensation code and displaying it in the Workers Compensation home page.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">To edit workers compensation code, double click on the required compensation record in the Workers Compensation Codes home page. The system displays the record in edit mode.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Make the required changes and click on <strong>Update</strong> to save the new changes.</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif;"><span style="font-size: medium; color: rgb(79, 129, 189);"><strong>II. Import</strong></span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">Using the Import link, you can import the workers compensation codes from other application into AkkenCloud.</span></p><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;">To import the compensation codes, do the following:</span></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">Click on <strong>Import</strong> link available in the <strong>Workers Compensation Codes</strong> home page. The system displays the Import screen:</span></li></ul><p><span style="font-size: medium;"><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041507090/original/_FWzdoVn5OOi3A3T0V9wI_FKmDZTG0bOJw?1501084225" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041507090/original/_FWzdoVn5OOi3A3T0V9wI_FKmDZTG0bOJw?1501084225" data-fileid="4041507090" data-uniquekey="1501084148023"></span></p><ul> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Specify the file format and select the required file you want to import from your local drive.</span></li> <li><span style="font-size: medium;">Once you have selected the required file by clicking on <strong>Browse</strong> button, click on <strong>Import</strong> link.</span></li> </ul><p style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);"><span style="font-size: medium;"><strong>Note</strong>: Make sure that you upload the .CSV file only.</span></p><ul style="font-family: Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif; color: rgb(74, 74, 74);" type="disc"><li><span style="font-size: medium;">The system displays the <strong>Field Mapping</strong> screen. Map the required fields in the mapping screen and finally click on <strong>Continue</strong>.</span></li></ul><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041507198/original/0jcSf_ikUh1ep-UjAzYLL9IF_ANjWy3bLg?1501084389" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041507198/original/0jcSf_ikUh1ep-UjAzYLL9IF_ANjWy3bLg?1501084389" data-fileid="4041507198" data-uniquekey="1501084148023"></p><ul><li><span style="font-size: medium;">The system now displays the Matching Criteria screen. In the <strong>Matching Criteria</strong> screen, click <strong>Continue</strong> link. The system refreshes by importing the selected file.</span></li></ul> 266150 318 4000012449 2017-07-26T11:53:29-04:00 4004241107 12 2 0 0 Accounting - Workers Compensation 2015-08-21T04:41:09-04:00 12054499 1 2015-05-21T14:57:32-04:00 9 3 To enable the Time In/Time Out feature, you would first need to enable it in your database.   To enable this feature in your database, you must go to Admin-->Payroll Setup. From there you would need to click on 'Time In & Time Out' in the 'Timesheet Layout Preference'.  On the create time sheet screen you would click the drop-down icon next to 'New Timesheet' and select 'Time In & Time Out':  From there you can go ahead and enter the time in/out and based on your payroll setup it will auto-calculate regular hours, overtime hours, and double time hours: <p style="background: rgb(250, 250, 250);"><span style="font-family: Helvetica, sans-serif; font-size: medium;"></span></p><p style="background: rgb(250, 250, 250);"><span style="font-family: Helvetica, sans-serif; font-size: medium;">To enable the Time In/Time Out feature, you would first need to enable it in your database.</span></p><p style="background: rgb(250, 250, 250);"><span style="font-family: Helvetica, sans-serif; font-size: medium;"> </span></p><p style="background: rgb(250, 250, 250);"><span style="font-family: Helvetica, sans-serif; font-size: medium;">To enable this feature in your database, you must go to Admin--&gt;Payroll Setup. From there you would need to click on 'Time In &amp; Time Out' in the 'Timesheet Layout Preference'.</span></p><p style="background: rgb(250, 250, 250);"><span style="font-size: 10px; font-family: Helvetica, sans-serif;"></span></p><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041511903/original/jAY0xoyzp7e7faDg-poOxIdPUwOr7B8MNg?1501092839" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041511903/original/jAY0xoyzp7e7faDg-poOxIdPUwOr7B8MNg?1501092839" data-fileid="4041511903" data-uniquekey="1501092762779"></p><p style="background: rgb(250, 250, 250);"><span style="font-size: 10px; font-family: Helvetica, sans-serif;"></span><span style="font-size: 10px; font-family: Helvetica, sans-serif;"></span></p><p><span style="font-size: medium;"><span style="font-family: 'Times New Roman', serif;"> O</span><span style="font-family: Helvetica, sans-serif; background-color: rgb(250, 250, 250);">n the create time sheet screen you would click the drop-down icon next to 'New Timesheet' and select 'Time In &amp; Time Out':</span><span style="font-family: 'Times New Roman', serif;"> </span></span></p><p><span style="font-size: 12px; font-family: 'Times New Roman', serif;"></span></p><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041511892/original/UjVbTJX33eUroEdZEjuZYaeE22rxTsECaQ?1501092812" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041511892/original/UjVbTJX33eUroEdZEjuZYaeE22rxTsECaQ?1501092812" data-fileid="4041511892" data-uniquekey="1501092762779"></p><p style="background: rgb(250, 250, 250);"><span style="font-family: Helvetica, sans-serif;"><span style="font-size: medium;">From there you can go ahead and enter the time in/out and based on your payroll setup it will auto-calculate regular hours, overtime hours, and double time hours:</span></span></p><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041511881/original/UHB6U9t1yLPqFJVAqtC1gqBxFZFE6ROKCg?1501092770" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4041511881/original/UHB6U9t1yLPqFJVAqtC1gqBxFZFE6ROKCg?1501092770" data-fileid="4041511881" data-uniquekey="1501092762779"></p><p><br></p> 266150 550 4000053481 2017-07-26T14:14:36-04:00 4004241107 13 2 9 3 Accounting - Time In/Time Out Feature 2015-08-21T04:41:09-04:00 4004241107 1 2017-02-03T14:36:38-05:00 0 0 To setup up discounts go o to Accounting > Customers > Discount Setup and create discounts. You'll need to give the discount a name and add the appropriate rate. Once you setup the discount, you will need to add the discount to any customer records you want to apply it to (when generating invoices). To do this, go to Accounting > Customers > open the customer record > go to Billing Information > Discounts > Select.   In the next screen, select the discounts you want to associate with the Customer record and click 'OK'.   In addition, you'll need to ensure that the Discount section is included in the Invoice Template of any invoices you are generating, using said templates. To check on this, go to Accounting > Customers > Create Invoices > Create/Edit Invoice Template. Select 'Edit' for the template you want to check and go to the Totals tab. Make sure Discounts is selected and click 'Update'.   Once this is all in place, you can choose whether to apply discounts or not, per invoice. <p>To setup up discounts go o to Accounting &gt; Customers &gt; Discount Setup and create discounts. You'll need to give the discount a name and add the appropriate rate.</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035631973/original/Z3O6U82mZggpnimdJWwjI5oSSlB11Jglpg.PNG?1486149688" rel="noreferrer" target="_blank"><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035631973/original/Z3O6U82mZggpnimdJWwjI5oSSlB11Jglpg.PNG?1486149688" data-id="4035631973" alt="image" title="image" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"></a></p><p><br></p><p>Once you setup the discount, you will need to add the discount to any customer records you want to apply it to (when generating invoices). To do this, go to Accounting &gt; Customers &gt; open the customer record &gt; go to Billing Information &gt; Discounts &gt; Select.</p><p>  <a href="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035632220/original/y9Le7qvpFHE2lOvBzmoJb7qG6ornxTa0mw.PNG?1486149920" rel="noreferrer" target="_blank"><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035632220/original/y9Le7qvpFHE2lOvBzmoJb7qG6ornxTa0mw.PNG?1486149920" data-id="4035632220" alt="image" title="image" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"></a></p><p><br></p><p>In the next screen, select the discounts you want to associate with the Customer record and click 'OK'.  </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035632253/original/-shJAEE9T6letlTtgbayAA_e5BtXgsnnkA.PNG?1486149952" rel="noreferrer" target="_blank"><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035632253/original/-shJAEE9T6letlTtgbayAA_e5BtXgsnnkA.PNG?1486149952" data-id="4035632253" alt="image" title="image" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"></a></p><p><br></p><p>In addition, you'll need to ensure that the Discount section is included in the Invoice Template of any invoices you are generating, using said templates. To check on this, go to Accounting &gt; Customers &gt; Create Invoices &gt; Create/Edit Invoice Template. Select 'Edit' for the template you want to check and go to the Totals tab. Make sure Discounts is selected and click 'Update'.  </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035632413/original/rZTsEl871u6P8pgXRdxS6Ceo9iElvcYbnw.PNG?1486150142" rel="noreferrer" target="_blank"><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035632413/original/rZTsEl871u6P8pgXRdxS6Ceo9iElvcYbnw.PNG?1486150142" data-id="4035632413" alt="image" title="image" class="fr-dii fr-draggable"></a></p><p><br></p><p>Once this is all in place, you can choose whether to apply discounts or not, per invoice.</p><p><br></p><p><img class="fr-dib fr-draggable fr-fil" src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035635475/original/Hh8URREF-b-FgqFiPW-DRl5ciRxGgvKiJA.PNG?1486156760" data-filelink="https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/4035635475/original/Hh8URREF-b-FgqFiPW-DRl5ciRxGgvKiJA.PNG?1486156760" data-fileid="4035635475" data-uniquekey="1486156747081"></p><p><br></p> 266150 127 4000096893 2017-02-03T16:19:28-05:00 4001711681 14 2 0 0 Setting up discounts 2017-02-03T14:36:38-05:00 4001711681